JP2019051405A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can suppress a difference in game result between a player who visually recognizes main display means and plays a game and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 includes main control means which performs a win/lose lottery of whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to a player and generates a special game state on the basis of a result of the win/lose lottery; and sub control means capable of performing control on the basis of a signal from the main control means. The Pachinko machine also includes: main display means controlled by the main control means and performing defined display for indicating a result of the win/lose lottery; performance display means which is controlled by the sub control means and performs performance display indicating or suggesting a result of the win/lose lottery; and irradiation means capable of irradiating light to the main display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, there are many cases where an effect display means is provided that follows the change display performed by the main display means and performs change display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, see Patent Document 1). In the effect display means, even when the result of the lottery is taught in the main display means, the result of the lottery result may be postponed only as a rough suggestion of the result of the lottery. Thereby, the opportunity of production can be increased, an inflection etc. can be attached by a game, and improvement of production performance, game performance, etc. can be aimed at.

JP 2006-271480 A

  By the way, there is a case where the game can be advantageously advanced by knowing the result of the lottery first, in this case, the game in which the game is performed while grasping the display mode of the main display means and visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired) between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, by enjoying the effect on the effect display means There is a concern that will be attached.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is between a player who visually recognizes the main display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in game results.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
An irradiating unit capable of irradiating light toward the main display unit is provided.

  The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

  According to the first aspect, it is possible to suppress a difference in game results between a player who visually recognizes the main display means and plays a game and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows structures, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the inner frame, the back pack unit, etc. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the main electrical structures of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the main process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd classification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flowchart which shows a special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination | determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st variable winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure change setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a common figure discrimination | determination information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a start winning apparatus control process. It is a flowchart which shows a reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a command determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decoration design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flowchart which shows holding information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding process. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a sub display apparatus setting process. It is a schematic perspective view of a composite display device unit. It is a front schematic diagram of a composite display device unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram (AA sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 40) of a composite display unit. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram for demonstrating a shutter structure. It is a front schematic diagram for demonstrating the positional relationship of a main display apparatus, a sub display apparatus, and a mounting panel. It is a front view of a main display device and a sub display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the stop aspect of a special display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation aspect of a special display apparatus. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite display apparatus unit in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the composite display apparatus unit in another embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the composite display device unit in another embodiment. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the composite display device unit in another embodiment.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outline of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame as a game board mounting frame is provided on one side of the outer frame 11. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 does not show game members (nails, accessories, etc.) disposed on the surface of the game board 30, a glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as a front frame, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper side frame constituting portion 11a and a lower side frame constituting portion 11b made of a wooden plate material, and the left side frame constituting portion 11c and the right side frame constituting portion 11d are made of aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

  An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower hinges 81 and 82 support the upper and lower portions of the inner frame 12 so that the inner frame 12 can be rotated. As a result, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. And the inner frame 12 etc. are accommodated in the space part formed inside the outer frame 11.

  The right side frame constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction toward the inside of the outer frame 11. The extending wall 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extending wall portion 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

  Furthermore, a resin curtain decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the opening / closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set up and down on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with the opening / closing axis serving as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 whose outer shape is rectangular, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed at the center of the resin base 38.

  A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening / closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, you may comprise the front frame set 14 so that it may be supported by the outer frame 11 so that opening is possible directly rather than via the inner frame 12.

  The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window 101 is formed at the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a front plate of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower plate 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. It can be stored inside. In addition, on the front side of the lower plate 15, a ball removal lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15 is provided.

  A game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as “handle 18”) is provided on the right side of the lower plate 15 so as to protrude to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation unit of the handle 18. When the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60 serving as launching means described later with a strength corresponding to the amount of pivoting operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibiting button 18 a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand that holds the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the launching device 60 is prohibited from launching the game ball. Therefore, the rotation of the handle 18 can be performed while prohibiting the launch of the game ball, or the launch of the game ball can be temporarily stopped while the handle 18 is held.

  An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via the lower plate communication passage 71 and the discharge port 16 described later.

  A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. Thereby, in the game hall or the like, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with a bill or a card inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation Rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary for a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lending to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, so-called cash machine.

  Further, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

  In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 with built-in LEDs are provided on the top plate 19. By pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative symbol display device 42 to be described later, etc. The corresponding production is performed or the production content is changed.

  In addition, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game while the light emission mode is changed and controlled according to a change in the gaming state. For example, at the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on when a predetermined error occurs are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. In addition, a large number of small through holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 corresponding to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

  A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not attached to a pair of conventional front and rear rectangular glass plates separately in front and rear pairs, but is formed into a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

  Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is mounted on the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 30 is in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39. Accordingly, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

  Further, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding a game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39. Yes. In the present embodiment, a solenoid-type firing device is employed as the firing device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 one by one to the firing position of the launching device 60 by driving a built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and a composite. A display unit 40 and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) various winning devices such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the start winning devices 33a and 33b, detection switches provided for the various winning devices. Based on this detection, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (the lower plate 15 when the upper plate 19 is full) (award balls are given).

  In the present embodiment, 10 balls are entered when the general winning device 31 is entered, 14 pieces are entered when the first variable winning device 32a is entered, and the second variable winning device 32b is entered. There are 13 balls when there is a ball, 2 balls when there is a ball entering the first start winning device 33a, and 1 game ball when there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b. Is configured to be paid out. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the game ball only by passing through (not discharged to the back side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area. A game ball that has not won a prize in various winning devices such as the general winning device 31 or the like is provided with the out port 36. It is discharged out of the game area. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as windmills (servants).

  A variable display device unit 35 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a center frame 47 so as to surround a decorative symbol display device 42 described later.

  A ball entrance 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and a game ball that has entered the ball entrance 151 passes through a warp channel 152 formed inside the center frame 47, as a decorative symbol. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls down on the stage 153 or the like and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends to the front and rear formed at the center of the stage 153. Or drop into the lead-out groove 154 guided forward.

  A first start winning device 33a is disposed below the variable display device unit 35. The first start winning device 33a protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened on the upper side. In particular, the game ball guided to the lead-out groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured to enter the first start winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. Note that the first start winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening / closing member that changes the ease of entering a game ball into the first start winning device 33a.

  A first variable winning device 32a is disposed below the first start winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is in an open state in which the game ball can win in the case of a corresponding type of jackpot state or the like. Although not shown, the first variable prize winning device 32a has a big prize opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big prize shutter for opening and closing the big prize opening, and a big prize for operating the big prize shutter. The first variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball that has entered the grand prize winning opening, and driving and controlling the big winning prize solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, in the “game area”, an area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “left side area”, and an area located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right side area”. That's it.

  At the lower part of the left side area, a general winning device 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge (inner rail constituting part 51) of the game area. The general winning device 31 protrudes forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which a game ball can always win is opened.

  A through gate 34 is disposed in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described in detail later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

  Further, a second start winning device 33b is disposed downstream of the through gate 34 in the right side region. The second start winning device 33b is provided with a pair of blade members 37 that can be rotationally displaced adjacent to the left and right sides of the winning opening (start winning port) of the second start winning device 33b in which a game ball can enter. Yes.

  Further, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball support support lottery for determining whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and a normal symbol display device 41 to be described later in detail. The variation display for teaching the result of the pitching support lottery is performed. If the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the game nail is disposed immediately above the start winning opening of the second start winning device 33b, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed position extending vertically, the game There is no room for the game ball to pass between the nail and the blade member 37, and the second start winning device 33b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the start winning port. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 is displaced to the open position that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the start winning port.

  Further, a second variable winning device 32b is disposed downstream of the second start winning device 33b. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and is in an open state in which game balls can be won in the corresponding type of jackpot state. Although not shown in the drawings, the second variable winning device 32b has a large winning opening that leads to the rear of the game board 30, a large winning shutter that opens and closes the large winning opening, and a large winning for operating the large winning shutter. The second variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a second count switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening, and controls the driving of the big prize opening solenoid to open and close the big prize shutter. 32b (large winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

  In the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b of this embodiment, the lower edge portion of the big prize shutter is pivotally supported along the lower edge portion of the big prize opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter extends vertically and closes the big winning opening, so that the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the big winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is inclined slightly downward toward the rear), The game ball that has flowed forward is received by the back (upper surface) of the big prize shutter and guided to the big prize opening.

  Further, an assist prize opening 48 through which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered is provided immediately above the second start prize-winning device 33b of the present embodiment. When a game ball is detected by the assist winning detection switch 227 that detects a game ball that has entered the assist winning port 48, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15.

  As will be described in detail later, the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b include a first start winning switch 224a and a second starting winning switch as condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball, respectively. 224b is provided, and when a game ball is detected by the start winning switches 224a and 224b, whether or not to generate a big hit state or the like is determined, and a special display device described later in detail 43a and 43b (and the decorative symbol display device 42) are configured to perform variable display. And when winning by lottery determination lottery, the special display devices 43a and 43b (and the decorative symbol display device 42) stop and display the variable display in a manner corresponding to the winning, and the first variable winning device 32a. Alternatively, a big hit state where the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

  In the present embodiment, there are a “low probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the winning lottery and a “high probability state” in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the winning lottery. Furthermore, the second start winning device 33b (blade member 37) is relatively frequently opened (open position), and a “highly entering state” that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b, There is a “low pitching state” in which the blade member 37 is hardly in the open position and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the low probability state and the low entry state are referred to as “normal mode”, and the low probability state and the high entry state are referred to as “time reduction mode”. A certain state is referred to as a “probability change mode”, and a state that is in a high probability state and a low entry state is referred to as a “latent probability mode”.

  Note that the high pitched state includes, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low pitched state, and (2) one opening time of the second start winning device 33b ( A state in which the specified time) is longer than that in the low entry state, and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second start winning device 33b is larger than in the low entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times the second start winning device 33b is released per winning of the winning support lottery is larger than that in the low entering state, (5) the winning probability of the winning support lottery is lower than in the low entering state. And so on. The high pitched-in state in the present embodiment adopts the configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to win the second start winning device 33b frequently, and the number of times that the winning lottery is executed is increased, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the jackpot state is generated, while the time reduction mode is the special display device 43a, even if the jackpot state does not occur. When the variable display in 43b is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the display is terminated and the mode is changed to the normal mode.

  In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is released relatively frequently to facilitate entering the ball, while the first starting winning device 33a enters the ball. Since it is not easy, when the player enters the probability change mode or the time reduction mode, the player fires the game ball toward the right side area where the second start winning device 33b is provided (so-called “right-handed”). ). In addition, at the timing of such right-handed strikes, an announcement for prompting a right-handed strike is made on the decorative symbol display device 42 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning ball is won in the first start winning device 33a (so-called “navel”) and the second start winning device 33b (so-called “electronic tulip”). , Denchu ”), the winning type is changed depending on whether the winning ball is won or not when the game ball enters the ball (the type determination referred to when determining the hit state type) The table is different).

  More specifically, as a jackpot type when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, the 16-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “16RS”) and the 8-round probability variation jackpot ( Hereinafter referred to as “8RS”), 8-round normal jackpot (hereinafter “8RN”), and 2-round probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RS”). Regarding “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the first variable winning device 32a is opened and then eight pieces are provided in the first variable winning device 32a. It is assumed that a game ball of 1 is entered as one round, and “16RS” is repeated 16 times, and “8RS” and “8RN” are repeated 8 times, and then the jackpot state ends. . On the other hand, regarding “2RS”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” are big hits (so-called “hit with big balls”) in which a large increase in game balls can be expected during the big hit state, but “2RS” This is a big hit that cannot be expected to increase significantly (so-called “no big hit”).

  In addition, “probability change mode” is given after the jackpot state of “16RS” and “8RS”, “latency mode” is given after the jackpot state of “2RS”, and after the jackpot state of “8RN” is finished “Time reduction mode” (in this example, 90 times of variable display) is given. In other words, after the big hit state of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” ends, the second start winning device 33b is in a high-pitch state in which the player is likely to be in an open state. A ball will be fired. In the present embodiment, in the case of winning or winning lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, 5% is “16RS”, 55% is “8RS”, 30% is the percentage. Becomes “8RN” and becomes “2RS” at a rate of 10%.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where “small hit” is won in the winning / notting lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, when a small hit is made, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. In other words, the first variable winning device 32a is the same as “2RS” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, for example, when “2RS” is won in the normal mode, the mode is shifted to the latent mode, but the normal mode is continued even if the small win is won in the normal mode. As a result, in the winning lottery based on the winning to the first start winning device 33a, the first variable winning can be achieved without performing the allocation such as winning the two round big hit (two round normal big hit) to which the high probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it is always known that the device 32a has been shifted to the high probability state by being opened twice.

  On the other hand, as the types of jackpots when winning the jackpot state based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, the 16-round probability variation jackpot, the 8-round probability variation jackpot, and the two round regular jackpot (hereinafter “2RN”) Say). Note that when the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round end) Although the conditions are the same, the number of payouts (14 and 13 are different) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, respectively, but for convenience of explanation, the second starting winning device 33b. The same name (“16RS”, “8RS”) is also used for convenience for the type of jackpot in the case of winning in the winning or failing lottery based on the entry to the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition in the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. Certain (eight winnings, or one round after 30 seconds) may be different (for example, the upper limit of winnings for gaming balls in the round is eight and nine).

  As for “2RN”, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. That is, regarding “16RS” and “8RS”, although a significant increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state, “2RN” is a jackpot where a significant increase in game balls cannot be expected.

  In addition, “time reduction mode” is given after the end of the big hit state of “2RN”. In this example, “2RN” is also divided into three parts, “2RN30” to which a time reduction mode corresponding to 30 fluctuation displays is given, and “2RN60” to which a time reduction mode for 60 fluctuation indications is given. There is “2RN90” to which a time reduction mode for 90 displays is given. In the present embodiment, when winning a lottery in the winning lottery based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, it becomes “16RS” at a rate of 35%, “8RS” at a rate of 35%, and a rate of 20% Becomes “2RN30” at a rate of 5%, and becomes “2RN90” at a rate of 5%.

  Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small win is won in the winning / notch lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33b. In the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b, when a small hit is made, the second variable winning device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, and this is repeated twice. From this, the small hit state ends. That is, the second variable winning device 32b is the same as “2RN” in appearance. However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. In other words, a high probability state such as probability variation mode basically shifts to a low probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning “2RN”. The mode continues. As a result, the second variable prize-winning device 32b is opened twice shortly without performing the assignment to win the 2-round probability variable big hit “2RS” in the winning / not-winning lottery based on the winning to the second starting prize-winning device 33b. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is always known that the state has shifted to the low probability state.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 40 etc., in this embodiment, the game to the 1st start prize-winning device 33a and the 2nd start prize-winning device 33b adjoins the lower right part of the substantially elliptical game area. During the variable display on the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, and the special display devices 43a and 43b on which the variable display for teaching the result of the lottery determination performed based on the entrance of the ball is performed. The first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b indicating that the change display corresponding to the received ball is stored when the game winning ball enters the start winning devices 33a and 33b. And a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variation display for teaching the result of the lottery support lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34, and the normal symbol display device 41 during the variation display When a game ball passes to the game 34, a composite display device unit 40 is provided in which the normal hold display device 44 indicating that the variable display corresponding to the pass is held and stored is unitized. .

  As shown in FIG. 44 and the like, in the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal Display devices that are directly controlled by the main control device 261 such as the hold display device 44 are collectively mounted on one substrate. Hereinafter, the substrate on which the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal hold display device 44 are mounted is referred to as “ This will be referred to as “main display device 49”.

  In the present embodiment, adjacent to the lower right part of the game area, the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 is provided so that the composite display device unit 40 installed outside the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. And the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 is extended and formed in the front view lower right (refer FIGS. 1-3).

  As shown in FIGS. 43, 44, etc., the first special display device 43a is composed of eight LEDs (hereinafter referred to as “first special figure lamp 401”). The first special figure lamps 401 are arranged at equal intervals in four rows in two upper and lower rows, and the lower row is arranged so as to be shifted to the right by one lamp from the upper row. The first special display device 43a performs switching display (variable display) of the first special figure lamp 401 when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a.

  The second special display device 43b is composed of eight LEDs (hereinafter referred to as “second special figure lamp 402”), and is disposed below the first special display device 43a. The second special figure lamp 402 is also arranged in such a manner that four rows are arranged at equal intervals in two upper and lower rows, and the lower row is shifted to the right by one lamp from the upper row. The second special display device 43b performs switching display (variation display) of the second special figure lamp 402 when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b.

  Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery determination. That is, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (the combination of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 that is lit) is associated with the various results of the lottery determination. Depending on the lighting mode at the time of stop, the result of the lottery determination, that is, “big hit”, “small win”, or “out” is definitely displayed. Further, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, “16RS”, “8RS”, “8RN”, “2RS”, “ 2RN "is also taught. Also, there are a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that teach various types of big hits, small hits, and disengages, and there are a plurality of stop modes, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. The

  The stop display in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and is configured to be able to start the next variable display after the specified time has elapsed. Further, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, if the next variable display is not performed even after the specified time has elapsed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b. The special display device 43b is configured to be switched from a lighting mode indicating a result of the lottery determination to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is performed.

  Further, in the left-right direction, the leftmost first special figure lamp 401 and the leftmost second special figure lamp 402 are aligned, and the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 are arranged. 2 The position with the special figure lamp 402 is aligned. Further, the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the present embodiment use LEDs (light emitting means) of the same product. That is, a row in which four LEDs arranged on the left and right are displaced to the left (upper row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402) and a row that is displaced to the right (the lower row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402) are arranged vertically. It looks like alternating.

  In addition, a first hold display device 46a and a second hold display device 46b are arranged above the first special display device 43a. Each of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b includes two LEDs arranged side by side (hereinafter, the LED constituting the first hold display device 46a is referred to as a "first hold lamp 403" The LED constituting the display device 46b is referred to as “second holding lamp 404”).

  The second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) is disposed on the right side of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403). Further, in the left-right direction, the rightmost second holding lamp 404 is at the same position as the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402, and the first holding lamp 403 and the second holding lamp The installation interval 404 is the same as that of the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402.

  In the present embodiment, the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) and the entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. The variable display based on the above (hereinafter referred to as “second variable display”) can be held and stored up to 4 times each (8 times in total). For example, when the first fluctuation display is held for one time, the first hold lamp 403 on the left side is lit, and when the first fluctuation display is held twice, the left and right first hold lamps 403 are turned on. When the first fluctuation display is held three times, the left first holding lamp 403 blinks, the right first holding lamp 403 lights up, and the first fluctuation display is held four times. If it is, the left and right first hold lamps 403 blink. When a new game ball wins the start winning devices 33a and 33b during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also suspended.

  Note that the suspended variation display is basically digested in the suspended order, but if both the first variation display and the second variation display are suspended, the second variation display is performed. The variable display is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variation display triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b is not fully digested, the first variation display triggered by entering the first starting winning device 33a is performed. It has no configuration. For example, in the state where one first hold lamp 403 is lit, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b and one second hold lamp 404 is lit, the first variation display is delayed. Thus, the second variation display is performed first.

  Further, a normal symbol display device 41 and a normal hold display device 44 are arranged below the second special display device 43b. Each of the normal symbol display device 41 and the normal hold display device 44 is provided with two LEDs arranged side by side (hereinafter, the LED constituting the normal symbol display device 41 is referred to as a “general lamp 405” and constitutes the normal hold display device 44) LED to be referred to as “ordinary holding lamp 406”).

  Further, the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) is arranged on the right side of the normal symbol display device 41 (normal map lamp 405). Further, in the left-right direction, the leftmost general-purpose lamp 405 is located at the same position as the leftmost first special-purpose lamp 401 and the second special-purpose lamp 402, and the general-purpose lamp 405 and the normal holding lamp 406 are installed. The interval is also the same as the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402.

  The normal symbol display device 41 is configured such that, for example, the right-hand general lamp 405 blinks (variably displays) when the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time by the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the lottery support lottery. That is, the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped (the combination of the lit general-purpose lamps 405) is associated with various results of the entrance support lottery, and the lighting mode when the variable display is stopped. Thus, the result of the entrance support lottery is displayed deterministically. For example, “winning” is indicated by lighting both the left and right common lamps 405, and “off” is indicated by lighting only the left common lamp 405.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 41 that is displayed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is configured to be able to hold and hold the variable display of up to four times. For example, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held once, the left normal hold lamp 406 is lit, and when held twice, the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are lit. When held for 3 times, the normal hold lamp 406 on the left side flashes, and the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side lights up. When held for 4 times, the left and right normal hold lamps 406 flash. To do. In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the big hit state, the corresponding change display is also held.

  Further, the first holding lamp 403, the second holding lamp 404, the normal holding lamp 406, and the general figure lamp 405 of the present embodiment are LEDs of the same product as the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402. I am using it. That is, four LEDs arranged on the left and right are displaced to the left (the upper row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and the row composed of the normal holding lamp 406 and the ordinary figure lamp 405), and displaced to the right side. The rows (the lower row of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the row constituted by the first hold lamp 403 and the second hold lamp 404) are alternately arranged vertically.

  Further, the main display device 49 (the substrate) has a left side of the first holding lamp 403 and an upper position of the first special figure lamp 401 located on the leftmost side, a right side of the general figure lamp 405, and At a position below the second special figure lamp 402 located on the rightmost side, a mounting hole 408 is formed through the board in the front-rear direction for mounting a screw.

  Further, the outer shape of the substrate of the main display device 49 is a first special figure lamp 401, a second special figure lamp 402, a first holding lamp 403, a second holding lamp 404, a normal holding which are arranged in a substantially matrix as a whole. The lamp 406, the general-purpose lamp 405, and the mounting hole 408 are enclosed in a substantially rectangular shape. However, the board of the main display device 49 is not provided with a lamp between the leftmost first special figure lamp 401 and the leftmost second special figure lamp, the leftmost second special figure lamp. 402, a portion where no lamp is provided between the normal holding lamp 406 on the left side and a portion where no lamp is provided between the first special figure lamp 401 on the right side and the second holding lamp 404 on the right side. A cutout portion 409 (see FIG. 44) is formed at a portion where the lamp between the rightmost first special figure lamp 401 and the rightmost second special figure lamp 402 is not provided.

  Now, the composite display device unit 40 of this embodiment includes a sub display device 411 that is provided adjacent to the left and right sides of the main display device 49 and is controlled by the sub control device 262. . As shown in FIG. 44, the substrate of the sub display device 411 has a shape that matches the left side or the right side of the substrate of the main display device 49, and can be installed by arranging four LEDs in the vertical direction. Part 412, an upper part and a lower part that protrude from the upper part and the lower part of the main body part 412, and an attachment part 413 in which an attachment hole 414 for attaching a screw is formed, and a main part part 412 that protrudes toward the substrate side of the main display device 49. It has a pair of upper and lower protrusions 415 that are inserted into the notch 409 and can install LEDs one by one.

  The LED mounted on the sub display device 411 (hereinafter referred to as “sub lamp 417”) is the same product as the LED mounted on the main display device 49. Further, the four sub lamps 417 installed in the main body 412 are installed so that their positions are aligned with the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 in the vertical direction. Also in the left-right direction, the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 are installed according to the installation interval. That is, as shown in FIG. 40, FIG. 43, etc., the sub lamp 417 of the pair of left and right sub display devices 411, the first special figure lamp 401 and the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 are collectively displayed. As seen, the same LEDs are arranged in a matrix of 4 columns × 7 rows.

  In the sub display device 411, the switching display of the sub lamp 417 is started in synchronization with the start of the variable display in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, and the first special display device 43a and the second special display device. In synchronization with the end of the variable display at 43b (stop display), the switching display of the sub lamp 417 is ended. Furthermore, the stop mode of the sub display device 411 is not associated with the results of various lotteries such as the winning lottery, and the sub display device 411 teaches or suggests the results of various lotteries such as the winning lottery. There is no.

  39 to 41 and the like, the composite display device unit 40 includes a mounting panel 421 for mounting the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411. The mounting panel 421 has a substantially rectangular plate shape that can cover the entire front surface on which various lamps (LEDs) of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are mounted, and is configured by a transparent resin. Furthermore, the mounting panel 421 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes 422 into which various lamps of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 can be inserted individually. In addition, the mounting panel 421 is formed with screw holes 423 and 424 that are aligned and fixed to the mounting holes 408 and 414 of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411.

  Then, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are inserted into the insertion holes 422 from the rear surface side of the mounting panel 421 until the substrates of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 contact the rear surface of the mounting panel 421. The screw holes 423 and 424 of the mounting panel 421 and the mounting holes 408 and 414 of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are aligned, and screws are inserted from the rear side of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411. Fix it. As a result, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are attached and fixed to the attachment panel 421.

  In the present embodiment, the first special display device 43a (first special figure lamp 401) and the second special display device 43b (second special figure lamp 402) constitute main display means and main control display means. The display device 411 (sub lamp 417) constitutes sub display means and sub control display means. Further, the variable display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b corresponds to a fixed display, and the variable display on the sub display device 411 corresponds to a pseudo display. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes an effect display means, and the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the effect display.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, the left and right side portions of the substrate of the main display device 49 have a stepped shape in which a portion on the rear surface side is notched. On the other hand, the side portion of the substrate of the sub display device 411 on the main display device 49 side has a stepped shape in which a portion on the front surface side is cut out, and the mounting panel 421 of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 is formed. In the attached state, the stepped portion of the main display device 49 and the stepped portion of the sub display device 411 overlap each other (the stepped portion of the main display device 49 is the stepped portion of the sub display device 411 and the mounting panel 421). It is configured to be sandwiched between Thereby, even in a configuration in which the mounting holes 408 of the main display device 49 are formed only in two places, the mounting state of the main display device 49 can be stabilized.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the mounting panel 421 includes a pair of left and right mounting pieces 426 that protrude to the left and right sides with respect to the sub display device 411 attached to the mounting panel 421. A pair of upper and lower mounting holes 427 penetrating the mounting panel 421 is formed. The mounting hole 427 of the present embodiment has a shape capable of mounting a countersunk screw, and the head of the countersunk screw is immersed in the mounting hole 427 when the countersunk screw is mounted.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 41, the composite display device unit 40 includes a base member 431 for attaching the composite display device unit 40 to the front side of the game board 30. The base member 431 is provided at a position corresponding to the substantially rectangular base plate 432 attached in contact with the front surface of the game board 30 and the mounting holes 427 of the mounting panel 421, and the mounting panel 421 is attached to the base plate 432. And a boss 433 for mounting with a predetermined distance. The mounting panel 421 is attached to the base member 431 by aligning the boss 433 of the base member 431 and the mounting hole 427 of the mounting panel 421 and fixing them with screws.

  Further, the base plate 432 is formed with a screw hole (not shown), and the base member 431 is attached to the front surface of the game board 30 by screwing the screw into the game board 30 through the screw hole. Installed. As a result, the composite display device unit 40 is attached and fixed to the front side of the game board 30.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, the composite display device unit 40 can be displaced between a covering position that covers a part of the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 and an exposed position that exposes the sub lamp 417. A covering shutter 441 as a covering means having a substantially rectangular plate shape is provided. The covering shutter 441 of the present embodiment covers or exposes four sub lamps 417 arranged in the vertical direction in the left sub display device 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “first sub display device 411a”) at a time. The first shutter 442 that can be used and the sub lamps 417 arranged in the vertical direction of the right sub display device 411 (hereinafter also referred to as “second sub display device 411b”) are covered or exposed at a time. And a second shutter 443 capable of performing the same.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the base member 431 is formed with a concave rail portion 445 that supports the upper and lower sides of each of the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A pair of upper and lower support bases 444 is provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 42, on the back surface side (rear surface side) of the covering shutter 441, in a state of being attached to the support base 444, below the mounting panel 421, the main display device 49, and the sub display device 411, and A rack portion 446 extending in the left-right direction is formed on a portion located above the lower support base 444.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 39, the base member 431 is spaced from the lower support base 444 by a predetermined distance below the mounting panel 421 so as to face the upper surface of the lower support base 444. A bearing stand 447 is provided at the upper position. Furthermore, the bearing base 447 and the lower support base 444 are provided with a pair of upper and lower shaft support portions (not shown) that can support the shaft portion 449 of the pinion 448 (see FIG. 42). When the pinion 448 is installed so that the shaft portion 449 is pivotally supported with respect to the support portion, and the upper side portion and the lower side portion of the covering shutter 441 are inserted into the rail portion 445 of the support base 444, the rack portion of the covering shutter 441 is provided. 446 and the pinion 448 are configured to mesh with each other.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 42, a shutter solenoid 451 is attached to the base member 431 as covering driving means for rotating the pinion 448. The shutter solenoid 451 is installed such that the plunger 452 extends in the front-rear direction, and a rack member 453 that meshes with the pinion 448 is attached to the tip of the plunger 452. The shutter solenoid 451 is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262 and is driven and controlled by the sub-control device 262. Then, the shutter solenoid 451 is energized to displace the covering shutter 441 to the covering position, and the shutter solenoid 451 is de-energized to displace the covering shutter 441 to the exposure position. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 41, an opening 456 for exposing the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 to the front is formed in front of the composite display device unit 40, and a covering shutter at the exposed position is formed. A cover 455 that can cover the front of 441 is provided.

  In addition, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 42 that performs variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. The display contents of the decorative symbol display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45 which will be described later. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the sub-control device 262 uses the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. The auxiliary display content is determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle, and lower three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area), and a plurality of types of decorations are provided in each symbol display area. Symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then in order for each symbol display region (for example, upper symbol display region → lower symbol display region → middle symbol display) The decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of the areas). For example, when the occurrence of the big hit state is determined by the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the big hit is made on the first or second special display device 43a, 43b, and the decorative symbol is given on the decorative symbol display device 42. (For example, in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a line on the predetermined active line) Is started. Of the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area, the first symbol display area is basically the upper symbol display area where the decorative symbol is first stopped. The second symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is secondarily stopped and displayed is also referred to as “second symbol display region”, and finally the middle symbol display region in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as “third symbol display area”.

  Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be. In this way, the state where the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the reach state. Of course, the occurrence of a reach condition does not necessarily result in a big hit, but may be missed.

  In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display region and the lower symbol display region is stopped and displayed on the same effective line. When it is made (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), a big hit state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered slot, “16RS” or “8RS” occurs, and in the case of an even-numbered slot, either “16RS”, “8RS”, or “8RN” occurs.

  The combination of decorative symbols other than the doublet basically teaches “displacement”. However, in this embodiment, even if the jackpot is “2RS” or “2RN”, the decorative symbol is a doublet. Instead of being stopped and displayed in combination, it is stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach. In addition, “small hit” is also stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach reach.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as effects that teach or suggest the game mode in which the user is staying. More specifically, either the “probability stage” in which it is determined that the user is staying in the probability variation mode, the “normal stage” in which it is determined that the user is in the normal mode, or the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. There are a “retraction stage” staying and a “precursor stage” staying in either the normal mode or the latent mode.

  For example, when “2RN” is won in the probability variation stage and the probability variation mode is ended, or when “small hit” is selected, the probability variation stage is terminated and the pullback stage is displayed. If “2RN” is won and the assigned time reduction mode period ends, the pull-back stage ends and the normal stage is displayed. In addition, when the “small hit” is won, there is no change in the game mode before and after the “small hit”, so the probability variation mode remains. Therefore, although it moves to the pull-back stage, it is easy to hit a big hit, and furthermore, when it exceeds the period corresponding to the maximum of the time reduction mode (for 30 times, 60 times, or 90 times of the special symbol variation display), It is possible to grasp that the mode is the probability variation mode.

  In addition, in the case where a big win is won in the winning lottery performed based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b, only “16RS” and “8RS” are the only types of jackpots that display the doublet on the decorative symbol display device 42. Absent. For this reason, basically (except when the variation display corresponding to the first start winning device 33a that has been put on hold is digested), in the probability variation stage and the pull back stage, that is, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode. When the jackpot instruction is given with the flat eyes in the decorative symbol display device 42, the assignment of the probability change mode is confirmed, and after the jackpot state, the process proceeds to the probability change stage.

  Further, for example, when “2RS” is won in the normal stage and the mode is changed to the latent probability mode, or when “small hit” is won, the normal stage is ended and the precursor stage is displayed. In the present embodiment, this precursor stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times with a special symbol variation display when “small hit” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the normal mode. After being derived in step 1, it returns to the normal stage. On the other hand, when “2RS” is a transition opportunity, that is, when staying in the latent mode, it is basically a precursor stage until a big hit. A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to return from the precursor stage to the normal stage, or after returning from the precursor stage to the normal stage, the lottery to determine whether or not to move to the precursor stage again (in the case of the latent mode). It is also possible to increase the probability of returning to the precursor stage, or it is desirable to win only in the latent mode.) In the case of the precursor stage in the normal mode, the stay period ( (The number of fluctuations) may be determined (in the latent mode, the sign mode is maintained). In addition, when the winning lottery based on the first start winning device 33a is won, “8RN” is won, and even though “8RS” is won, the probability change mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If the instruction is not taught, the process moves to the pull-back stage after the big hit state.

  As described above, if the correspondence between the stop mode of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the jackpot type is grasped, the stop mode of the special symbol fluctuation display is confirmed. If so, it is possible to determine which type of jackpot is won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the start winning devices 33a and 33b is suspended (the right to execute the variable display is obtained) is a decorative symbol. The display device 42 is also taught. For example, in the lower left part (holding display area) of the decorative symbol display device 42, a holding icon indicating that the variable display is held is displayed. A maximum of eight hold icons are displayed and are sequentially digested from the left one. Note that the hold icon of the present embodiment does not have information on whether the hold icon corresponds to the first variation display or the second variation display, and the same is true regardless of which one is supported. It is an embodiment.

  The game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and a rail 50 that guides a game ball launched from the launch device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 is attached. As a result, the game balls fired in accordance with the turning operation of the handle 18 are guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into a game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

  A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail constituting portion 51 (the upper left portion in FIG. 4). This prevents a situation in which the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially distal end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52. The game ball fired at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30.

  In the present embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is interrupted at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is interrupted at the lower right portion of the game board 30. For this reason, the game area is defined by the inner peripheral surface of the rail 50 and the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail constituting portions 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. It is burned.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 connected from a payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected from the payout mechanism portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball path unit 70 of the front frame set 14 includes the above-described gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. Thereby, if the game ball launched from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns to the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is returned to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Discharged.

  3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding a game ball paid out by a payout mechanism portion 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67. When the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward by an urging force of a spring or the like so that the outlet of the payout passage 67 is almost closed. ing. When the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In addition, the inlets (sphere inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, each of the inlets and the discharge passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. For this reason, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be dispensed flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection It will be paid out to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

  In addition, the ball path unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects a game ball located in the lower dish communication path 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower plate communication path 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the full detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full using a display or sound on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used. Is controlled. When the game ball stays in the lower tray communication path 71 and the game ball is not detected by the full detection switch (when it is not detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

  Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. Various control boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 10 so as to be lined up, down, left and right, and partially overlapped in the front and back, and further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls And a protective cover made of resin. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack. Therefore, this unit is referred to as a “back pack unit 203”.

  First, the back configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from the back side. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative symbol display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub control device 262, which are liquid crystal display devices facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, can be attached and detached in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The decorative symbol display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42 a in which an opening for exposing the display unit (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative symbol display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is accommodated in the substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative symbol display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is accommodated in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is disposed. The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Under the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls won in various winning devices. The game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 on which the main controller 261 is mounted is pivotally supported with respect to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

  The main controller 261 is accommodated in a substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board | substrate box 263 connected with the sealing member becomes a structure which cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily find out that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball entry detection switch that detects game balls that have entered the various winning devices corresponding to various winning devices such as the general winning device 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, and a first count switch is provided in the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided, and an assist winning detection switch 227 is provided at the assist winning opening 48. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are provided with a first start winning switch 224a and a second start winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

  Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, the assist winning detection switch 227, the through gate switch 225, and the cable connector. A first board surface relay board to be connected is provided. The first board surface relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 through a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start winning switch 224a and the second start winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via the connector cable without passing through the relay board.

  The detection results detected by the various entrance detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) corresponding to the winning situation at each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and a predetermined number of game balls are based on the output signal from the payout control device 311. Is dispensed (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, the back of the game board 30 is provided with a big prize opening solenoid that opens the big prize opening in the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b. A prize opening solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 37 by the start winning apparatus 33b is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays between the solenoid and the main controller 261.

  Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is a unit in which a back pack 351 formed of resin and a payout mechanism portion 352 for a game ball are integrated. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an open / close axis extending along the vertical direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left part of the back pack unit 203 (upper right part in FIG. 5).

  The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, no reference numerals are given, but for example, a terminal for outputting information relating to the current gaming state (such as jackpot state or probability variation mode), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. Terminals for outputting information relating to 12 opening, terminals for outputting information relating to various error states such as a ball entry error, a lower pan full error, a tank ball no error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals for outputting information on the number of balls are provided.

  The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in the present embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 covers the upper portion and the right portion of the substrate box 263 (the left portion in FIG. 5). Thereby, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided at the right part of the board box 263 and the terminal part (board side connector) provided along the upper edge part of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

  The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 opened upward is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 that has two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected. Further, a case rail 357 is formed vertically on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are paid out appropriately according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

  The payout mechanism 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power from the outside. Yes. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, an AC 24V main power supply via a voltage converter, and the power switch 382a is switched on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

  Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), there is provided a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported at the left side of the inner frame 12 (right side in FIG. 5) and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and a game ball is placed in the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. That is, the game balls won in each winning device such as the general winning device 31 are gathered through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217. In addition, the out port 36 leads to the discharge passage portion 217 in the same manner, and the game balls that have not won any winning port are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured separately and can be opened and closed independently. However, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also good to do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state where they are stacked in front and back. Is attached.

  The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are accommodated in the substrate box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually configured by a single board (printed board).

  The payout control device 311 is housed in the substrate box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the substrate box 313a (the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The substrate box 311a in which the dispensing control device 311 is accommodated is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the substrate box 263 in which the main control device 261 is accommodated, so that an unsealed trace of the substrate box 311a remains. It has become.

  In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is accommodated in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

  Further, the dispensing control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogged in the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a rotates forward and backward to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

  Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the substrate box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, so that even if a power failure occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power failure and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, if the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. If you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and hold the power .

  As shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 and the like) exposed on the front surface side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700, and the inside is operated by rotating to one side. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

  In addition, as described above, the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 is formed in the right side frame constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 (FIG. 5). reference). Thereby, it becomes difficult to make a wire etc. approach from the back side of outer frame 11, and to operate locking device 600 with the wire etc. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided on the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right side on the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can move in and out of the switch main body, and the front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection unit faces rearward. When the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch main body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch main body and is immersed in the switch main body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection unit is pressed on the back surface of the front frame set 14, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off by the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 and is detected when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main controller 261 (main board) as main control means is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer as an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. Various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip but may be configured as a chip for each function.

  The RAM 503 is a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501, the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like. ) And a backup area 503a.

  The RAM 503 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

  In the backup area 503a, when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. (Similarly) is an area for storing stack pointers, values of registers, I / O, and the like. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process. Conversely, the return of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main process at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, and so on). Executed in Note that a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 when a power failure occurs due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Due to the occurrence, the power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

  Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 incorporating the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, a main display device 49 (first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, a first display device 41). And second hold display devices 46a and 46b, normal hold display device 44) and the like are connected. With this configuration, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 and the sub display device 411 are controlled via the sub control device 262.

  In addition, for the sake of convenience, illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted, but the input / output port 505 includes a general prize switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, start prize switches 224a and 224b, through gate switch 225, and various switches of the handle 18. And various electrical components such as a solenoid for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input / output port 505 is configured by these terminal portions.

  A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 that stores fixed value data, and a control program that is stored in the ROM 552. RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, input / output port 554, bus line 555, and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit (not shown) It has. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

  A CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input / output port 554 via a bus line 555 and a display control device 45 is connected. Further, the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the sub display device 411, various illumination units and the lamps 102 and 104 are connected to the input / output port 554.

  The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261 and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display the display control device. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main control device 261 display that the jackpot has been won, and the sub control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 42 controlled by, the decorative symbol variation display is performed as an effect display in accordance with the variation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

  The payout control device 311 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, A work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored, and a backup area 513a are provided.

  The RAM 513 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a. Data is backed up. Note that if data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not always necessary to back up data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

  The backup area 513a has a stack pointer, each register at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. This is an area for storing values such as I / O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main process, and the restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed in the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the power failure signal SK1 is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  In the work area, a payout permission flag for which the payout control device 311 is set to allow the payout of prize balls, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and the main control device 261 And a command buffer for storing a command transmitted from.

  The payout permission flag is a flag for setting a prize ball payout permission, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and received, and is initially set. It is turned off when it is restored before the process or power shutdown. In the present embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command for instructing payout of a prize ball, and the main controller 261 having been restored to power. There are three payout return commands to be transmitted in this case.

  The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. Similar to the payout permission flag, an initial setting process or power-off is performed. It is turned off when returning to the front, and turned off when the command received by the command determination process is determined.

  The command buffer is configured by a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 through a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main controller 261, a launch controller 312 and a payout device 358 are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

  The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (a ball rental button 121 and a return button 122) on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (a ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to each other, and receive a ball lending operation command from the player and output it to the card unit. In a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted.

  The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal is detected that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibit button 18 a ( 1 is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and a game ball is launched with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.

  The display control device 45 executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 42 in accordance with an instruction from the sub-control device 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530 and 531. And. An input / output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 through a bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and a decorative symbol display device 42 as a liquid crystal display device is connected to the output port 529.

  The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

  The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data. The work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

  The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

  The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative symbol display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 526 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display it.

  The power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. And.

  The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside, generates + 12V power for driving various switches and motors, + 5V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Note that operation power (+12 V power, +5 V power, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. Based on the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute a power failure process (NMI interrupt processing).

  The power supply unit 541 normally outputs an output of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the process at the time of a power failure even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears backup data in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 in accordance with the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. The

  Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs lottery using various counter information in the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success / failure random number counter C1 as a success / failure random number generating means used for success / failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big hit state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not the reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the failure random number counter C1, a first In addition, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43a and 43b (decorated symbol display device 42) and the normal symbol display device 41 are selected (input). The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball support lottery) is used. Note that the variation selection counter C3 is also used for reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time in the decorative symbol display device 42, that is, the effect pattern, are determined.

  Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

  The RAM 503 stores a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area for storing the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal variation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series in accordance with the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

  The special variable reserved area includes a first special variable reserved area and a second special variable storage area each having four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas), and one execution area. In each holding area of the first special variation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first start winning device 33a. Stored serially. In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the fluctuation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second start winning device 33b. Stored serially. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b can be suspended up to four times.

  Explaining in detail each counter, the success / failure random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 599) as a closing price, 0 is a lower limit value as a starting price. It is the composition which returns to. Normally, when the success / failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success / failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the success / failure random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. On the other hand, the success / failure random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interruption), and the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 stored in the success / failure random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

  In this embodiment, the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit in the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is two, and the value is “7, 307”. In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 that is a big hit is 20, and the values are “7 to 16, 307 to 316”. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two success / failure determination tables as winning value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first winning / failing determination table storing “7, 307” as a jackpot value and a second winning / failing determination table storing “8-16, 308-316” as a jackpot value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the winning / randomizing counter C1 is used to draw a lottery based on whether or not the winning combination is won when the winning combination is not won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the random number counter C1 that is a small hit is one and the value is “404”, and the high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode). ), The number of values of the success / failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. For determining whether or not to win a small hit, a first small hit determination table storing “404” as a winning value and a second small hit determining table storing “405 to 413” as a winning value are referred to.

  In the normal mode, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning / losing lottery (probability of jackpot) is 1/300, the probability of winning a jackpot (small jackpot probability) is 1/600, When the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for 0.4 seconds.

  In the probability variation mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which is easier to hit than in the normal mode. In the probability variation mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entrance support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode. The start winning device 33b is opened three times and each opening time is 4 seconds (opening for 4 seconds is repeated three times with a closing period of 0.4 seconds). That is, in the probability variation mode, the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second start winning device 33b per winning of the winning support lottery is increased and the number of times of opening is increased. Will increase. As a result, the time period during which the second start winning device 33b is in the open state becomes longer, so that the game balls frequently enter the second start winning device 33b (becomes a high winning state). The lottery is continuously performed and the ball is in good condition. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning probability of the pitching support lottery may be set higher than that in the low pitching state.

  In the time reduction mode, the big hit probability is 1/300 and the small hit probability is 1/600. In the time reduction mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the winning support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is released three times. In addition, each opening time is 4 seconds. That is, the time shortening mode is the same as the probability variation mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is seen, although the jackpot probability is the same low probability as in the normal mode. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of “8RN” or “2RN” is finished, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b display a total of a predetermined number of fluctuations (a uniform 90 times after “8RN”). Thus, “2RN” is set to the time reduction mode over 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”). Further, the time reduction mode ends when the specified number of times of variation display is performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the big hit state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

  In the latent mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. In the latent mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. In other words, the latent probability mode has the same high probability as the jackpot probability in the probability variation mode, but is the same as the normal mode when only the operation of the second start winning device 33b is viewed. In the present embodiment, the latent mode is set after the end of the “2RS” jackpot state, and continues at least until the jackpot state occurs. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning lottery based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a, there is no allocation that “2RN” is won, so the latent probability mode ends quietly. This situation is avoided (continues until winning the jackpot with a lottery).

  For example, the type determination counter C2 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), the type determination counter C2 returns to 0 that is the lower limit value. The ROM 502 also includes a first type determination table (corresponding to the first start winning device 33a) and a second type determination that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. A table (corresponding to the second start winning device 33b) is provided. Then, when the jackpot is won in the winning / losing lottery, the type of the jackpot state type given based on the value of the type determination counter C2 is determined (type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

  The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. The value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  The variation selection counter C3 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), it returns to the lower limit value of 0. In this embodiment, the reach selection state is generated by the variation selection counter C3, and after the reach state is generated with respect to the decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. The final stop symbol after the stop is to draw lots of “reach other than front / rear off” that stops before and after the reach symbol and “complete out” that does not cause reach. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type. The reach determination table stores a value of “0 to 238”, C3 = 0, 1 corresponds to the back and forth reach, C3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than back and forth, and C3 = 22 to 238 is complete. It has a configuration corresponding to the detachment.

  The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. The value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball has won the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b. .

  In addition, one of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then reaches the lower limit value. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 37, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 37), and then returns to the lower limit value of 0. It has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach pattern of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the occurrence of reach. A more detailed symbol variation mode is determined, such as an elapsed time until the middle symbol (in this example) stops. Accordingly, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or to determine the symbol variation mode in combination by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

  Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbol by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In addition, the magnitude | size and range of each counter are only examples, and can be changed arbitrarily. However, the sizes of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and it is desirable that they are values that are not synchronized in any case.

  Further, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 99, the lower limit is returned to 0). The random number counter C4 is updated periodically (once every timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the left or right through gate 34. The number of random number values to be won in the ball state is one and the range is “1.” On the other hand, the number of random number values to be won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” When the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the winning is displayed after the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time. ("○" in this example) stops Shown, it is opened in a pattern in which the second start winning device 33b is corresponding to the game mode at that time.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, various winning switch reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

  When there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. Further, in an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 and a prize ball is given based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ) Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

  In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are maximized (in this embodiment, 599, 19 respectively). 238, 99) is cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  After that, in step S304, a start winning process is performed in accordance with the winning (winning) in the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, and in step S305, a through gate passing process is performed in accordance with the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34. . Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is temporarily terminated.

  Here, the start winning process in step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the RAM 503 has a first hold counter Na for counting the number of variable display hold times triggered by winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a variable display hold time triggered by winning in the second start winning device 33b. A second holding counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

  In addition, the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area include a random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1, a winning random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, and a variable selection counter C3. A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the success / failure random number storage area stores the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 using 2 bytes. Each of the winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

  Furthermore, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, the first variation display based on winning in the first start winning device 33a or the second variation display based on winning in the second starting winning device 33b is performed. A variable storage area is provided in which information indicating whether or not is stored. Hereinafter, “the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area” is also referred to as “the first variation flag is turned on”, and “the second variation display is performed in the variation storage area”. The information indicating “is stored” is also referred to as “the second variation flag is set to ON”.

  First, in step S501, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S504, addition display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the second variable display by one is performed. That is, when both of the pair of left and right second holding lamps 404 are turned off, the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on, and the left second holding lamp 404 is turned on and the right second holding lamp 404 is turned on. When 404 is off, both the left and right second hold lamps 404 are turned on, and when both left and right second hold lamps 404 are on, the right second hold lamp 404 is turned on. If the second hold lamp 404 on the left is blinking, and the second hold lamp 404 on the left is in a blinking state and the second hold lamp 404 on the right is in a lighting state, both the second hold lamps 404 on the left and right are blinked. To perform the process.

  After step S504, in step S505, the values of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated by the random number update process in step S303 (a result random number counter buffer, a type determination counter buffer, and a variation). Each value stored in the selection counter buffer) is stored in the first area (the success / failure random number storage area, the winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area) among the reserved areas that are free in the special variable reservation area. After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

  In step S506, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small win. Details of the success / failure determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S507, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A type determination process is performed to determine the type. Details of the type determination process will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S508, if it is determined in step S506 that the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the deviation is determined based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of change is performed. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

  Here, details of the success / failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5101, whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches either “7” or “307” which is the value stored in the first success / failure determination table. Is determined. Incidentally, “7” and “307” are values that are big hits in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  In FIG. 14, for convenience, the process of step S5101 is simplified. However, in actuality, whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7” is determined, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “307”, and if an affirmative determination is made in either of these determinations, an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step S5101, a negative determination is made in step S5101.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, the process ends after turning on the first success / failure flag in step S5102. In this embodiment, in addition to the success / failure random number storage area for storing the value of the success / failure random number counter C1, a separate success / failure flag is not provided, but information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the failure / randomness storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the success / failure random number storage area uses 2 bytes. In step S5102, for example, “101010101010101010” is set for the success / failure random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting for the success / failure random number storage area is referred to as turning on the first success / failure flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5101, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5103 is the value stored in the second success / failure determination table “8-16, 308”. ˜316 ”or not. Incidentally, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are jackpots only in the probability variation mode. In the determination process, in practice, it is determined one by one whether or not the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 matches each value corresponding to the jackpot as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, the second success / failure flag is turned on in step S5104, and then the process ends. Note that turning on the second success / failure flag here means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the success / failure random number storage area.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the result is “out” even in a high probability state, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variable holding area in step S5105 is the first. It is determined whether or not the value matches “404” which is a value stored in the small hit determination table. Incidentally, “404” is a value that is a small hit in both the low probability state and the high probability state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, information on whether or not a small hit state occurs is also stored (overwritten) in the corresponding random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in step S5107 is the value stored in the second small hit determination table “405 to 413”. It is determined whether or not any of the above. Incidentally, “405 to 413” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5107, the present process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information related to success / failure is stored using 2 bytes. For example, when noise occurs, the success / failure flag (the content stored in the failure random number storage area) is rewritten. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a big hit state is generated even though it is not a win, or a big win state does not occur even though it is a win. Further, the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the success / failure determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success / failure random number storage area. is there.

  In addition to the pass / fail random number storage area that stores the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1, a pass / fail flag is additionally provided, and at this time, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 is kept stored, and a variable display described later is displayed. In the variable display setting process that is performed at the start, the determination may be made by referring to the corresponding table based on the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. Further, a random number counter for small hits may be provided separately from the success / failure random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

  Next, the second type determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5402, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5402, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determining counter C2, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided, and “16RS” or the like is indicated in the winning type random number storage area. This information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5403, for example, “10101010” is set for the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating a jackpot type (such as a 16RS flag). explain. Note that the pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determining process is not used when the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RS” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “7 to 13”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5404, then in step S5405, the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, “00011111” is set for the winning type random number storage area), and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5404, in step S5406, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN30” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “14-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5406, the 2RN30 flag is turned on in step S5407, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5406, in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RN60” in consideration of the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches “18”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, the process is terminated after the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5408, since the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is the value “19” corresponding to “2RN90”, in step S5410, 2RN90 After the flag is turned on, this process ends. In the type determination process, it is only necessary to be able to determine the jackpot type. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16RS” having a large number of random values corresponding to winning matches the acquired random number value, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2RN90” matches the acquired random number value.

  Next, the reach determination process in step S508 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first hit / no-go flag is set in the hit / no-go determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is large in both the low probability state and the high probability state (a jackpot state always occurs), this processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if a big hit state does not occur at least in a low probability state (there is a possibility of losing), a reach determination table is referred to in step S5302, and a new determination is made. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area coincides with one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to “front / rear out of reach”. If the determination in step S5302 is affirmative, in step S5303, the front / rear flag indicating the occurrence of front / rear out of reach is turned on, and then the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3, a separate front / rear flag is not provided, but information indicating that “rear / rear reach” is in the reach random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte. In step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set for the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting for the reach random number storage area will be referred to as turning on the front / rear flag.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5302, the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area in consideration of the reach determination table in step S5304 corresponds to “reach other than forward / backward deviation”. It is determined whether or not the value matches any of the values “2 to 21”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5304, the flag is turned on other than before and after in step S5305, and then the present process ends. Note that turning on the flags other than the front and rear here means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5304, that is, if the change display ends without complete reach, the process is terminated as it is. The pattern (the combination of “1” and “0”) set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S509 following step S508, a process for setting a starting command is performed. In the advance command, the fluctuation information stored on hold (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the fluctuation display) is triggered by either the first start winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. And information indicating the results of the determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing are included and output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). .

  After the process of step S509, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S510, whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning device 33 is determined by the first start winning switch 224a. It discriminate | determines by the detection information of. If a negative determination is made in step S510, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, in step S511, the value of the first hold counter Na that counts the number of variable display holds triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a is the upper limit (in this embodiment, It is determined whether or not it is less than “4”). If a negative determination is made in step S511, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S511, the process proceeds to step S512, and the first hold counter Na is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S513, an addition display process of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the first variation display by one is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right first hold lamps 403 are turned off, the left first hold lamp 403 is turned on, and the left first hold lamp 403 is turned on and the right first hold lamp 403 is turned on. When the 403 is off, both the left and right first hold lamps 403 are turned on. When both the left and right first hold lamps 403 are turned on, the right first hold lamp 403 is turned on. The first hold lamp 403 on the left side is blinked, and when the first hold lamp 403 on the left side is blinking and the first hold lamp 403 on the right side is lit, both the first hold lamps 403 on the left and right are blinked. To perform the process.

  After step S513, in step S514, each value of the success / failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is changed to a reserved area (a success / failure random number storage area, a winning type random number storage area, (Reach random number storage area). After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

  In step S515, a success / failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. The details of the success / failure determination process have already been described above.

  In the subsequent step S516, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area, the jackpot A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, a case where a big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the first start winning device 33a, and a case where the big win is won in the winning lottery based on the winning in the second starting winning device 33b, Therefore, the distribution of the jackpot type to be given is different.

  Here, the first type determination processing in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second success / failure flag is set to ON in the previous / failure determination processing performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility of a jackpot state), the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (there is a possibility that a jackpot state may occur), in step S5202, the type determination counter newly stored in the special variation holding area is referred to by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the process ends after the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is set to a value corresponding to “8RN” in consideration of the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “12-17”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5204, the process is terminated after the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5205.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to a value corresponding to “2RS” in consideration of the first type determination table in step S5206. It is determined whether or not it matches any of “18, 19”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 2RS flag is turned on in step S5207. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the process is terminated after the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area A reach determination process for determining the type of reach is performed based on the value of the selection counter C3. Details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

  After step S517, in step S518, a starting command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33b, the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 or the like is directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the pass / fail determination process. The type determination process and the reach determination process are executed. However, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, provisional storage areas (working areas) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the validity random number counter C1 are acquired are provided, and the information for determining whether or not the information is stored in the temporary storage area. After executing the determination process and the reach determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the corresponding reserved area of the special fluctuation reserved area.

  Note that the process of extracting the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes the discriminant value extraction process, and the value of the pass / fail random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 is stored in the special variable holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the process for determining whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in step S506, step S515 (step S5101, step S5103, step S5105, step S5107) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success / failure determination process. Then, the determination result is stored (the correspondence flag is set), and the processing of step S5102, step S5104, step S5106, and step S5108 constitutes the result storage processing.

  Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step S601, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc <4, the process proceeds to step S603, where the normal holding counter Nc is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the increase in the number of hold of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed by one. That is, when both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are off, the left normal hold lamp 406 is turned on, the left normal hold lamp 406 is on, and the right normal hold lamp 406 is off. If both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are lit, the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are left on and the left normal hold lamp 406 is turned on. When the left normal hold lamp 406 is flashing and the right normal hold lamp 406 is lit, a process for flashing both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 is performed.

  After step S504, in step S605, a random number related to the success / failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number update process in step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage area of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is terminated.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process. This process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interruption, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

  That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process. In step S401, the CPU 501 stores the power interruption occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and performs the NMI interruption process. finish.

  The above NMI interrupt processing is executed in the same manner in the payout control device 311, and information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. The NMI interrupt process in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

  Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is started upon reset when power is turned on.

  First, in step S101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, 1 is set in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control device (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable. Wait processing is performed for about 2 seconds. In the subsequent step S102, RAM access is permitted.

  Thereafter, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 to clear (erase) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether or not occurrence information of power supply interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, no backup data is stored, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. That is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case, the process also proceeds to step S112.

  In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113 and the like). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of the RAM determination value, it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to a RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the use area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed (step S103: NO), it is a condition that the information on occurrence of power interruption is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal. In addition, the process at the time of power recovery (process at the time of power failure recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power interruption is cleared.

  In step S109, a command for returning the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process proceeds to normal processing described later.

  Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed with the remaining time.

  First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the start winning devices 33a and 33b updated in the previous normal process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is transmitted. External output processing that is transmitted to each control device on the side is executed.

  For example, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol, a variation pattern command, a symbol command, or the like is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform a display effect in accordance with the display performed by the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command, the symbol command, etc. determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the various commands, and the variation mode. Is indicated to the display control device 45 so as to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display).

  The variation pattern command includes information for specifying the variation type of the decorative symbol such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines a variation display effect pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45 and sound.

  Here, the variation types of decorative symbols will be described. “Normal reach” is a reach pattern that does not display any special effects other than the variation of the decorative design. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variable display time is shortened compared to the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode even in various reach cases. For example, the variable display time from which the normal reach is derived is “15 seconds” in the normal mode and the latent accuracy mode, and “10 seconds” in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

  “Super Reach” is a display in which a specific character or the like performs a specific action on the decorative symbol display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbol during the decorative symbol variation display (after the reach state is established). This is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared as super reach, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach.

  “Premium reach” is an effect that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs. During the decorative symbol variation display (after reaching the reach state), in addition to the decorative symbol, a character having a pattern different from the super reach, etc. This is a reach pattern in which the player is expected to have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach.

  In addition, the fluctuation display time for “completely out” that does not result in any reach state is set to “10 seconds” in the normal mode, and “6 seconds” in the probability change mode and the time reduction mode.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. The combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, normal jackpot symbol combination, chance symbol combination, front / rear symbol combination, Six categories of combination and combination of completely out of symbol are designated. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the fluctuation time has elapsed. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, a combination of probability variation jackpot symbol, a combination of normal jackpot symbol, a combination of front / rear off symbol, a combination of symbols other than front / rear off symbol, a completely out symbol The five categories of combinations are designated. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 stops displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the symbol command.

  If you win a promising jackpot ("16RS" and "8RS" that can be expected to increase game balls) (hereinafter also referred to as "probable jackpot with a ball"), or a normal jackpot ("8RN") where you can expect an increase in gaming balls. In the following, when the winning combination is also called “Normal jackpot with a ball”, the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols with numerical patterns. It becomes. In the present embodiment, in the case of “probable big hit with a ball”, a probable big hit symbol that is a combination of decorative symbols made up of odd numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 or 2 , 4, 6 and 8, the variable display is stopped for any combination of the normal jackpot symbol, which is a combination of decorative symbols consisting of even-numbered slotted eyes. Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbol.

  When the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command for the probable change with big ball, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the symbol combinations consisting of any one of the first to ninth symbols as a stop symbol, When a normal jackpot symbol command is received, one of the symbol combinations of 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as a stop symbol.

  The combination of front / rear detachment symbols corresponds to “front / rear detachment reach” in which, after reaching, the final stop symbol is stopped by shifting by one before and after the reach symbol. In the present embodiment, the combination of front and rear out-of-line symbols is selected as a stop mode not only when “out” but also when “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit” are won. It has become.

  The combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment corresponds to “reach other than front / rear detachment” in which the final stop symbol stops other than before or after the reach symbol after reach occurs. The combination of completely missed symbols corresponds to “completely missed” in which even reach is not generated.

  Although details will be described later, the sub-control device 262 determines a combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553 as a stop symbol when receiving these off-line symbol commands. In this embodiment, three commands are prepared for the symbol command for detachment. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for detachment, and the sub-control device 262 displays a decorative symbol. It is good also as a structure which determines a combination.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, update of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is executed. More specifically, as with the other counters, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), respectively. To do. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

  Thereafter, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b is performed, and determination of jackpot and setting of variable display in the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

  In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when winning in the winning / losing lottery based on entering the first start winning device 33a, a big win state or a small win state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the first variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery based on the winning to the second start winning device 33b is won, a big win state or a small win state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. Yes. Details of the second variable winning device control process will be described later.

  In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control related to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

  In step S209, a start winning device control process is executed. In this process, control related to the start winning devices 33a and 33b is performed. Details of the start winning device control process will be described later.

  After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S211 whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal process. ) Or not. And if predetermined time has already passed, it will transfer to Step S201 and will repeat the processing after the above-mentioned Step S201.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. Repeatedly execute (step S212, step S213).

  That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

  In step S213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example). Then, the change values of the variation type counters CS 1 and CS 2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the pass / fail random number counter C1) can be updated at random and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

  Further, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), the power is cut off, so that the processing after step S214 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power interruption. Is called. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the value of the stack pointer is saved in the backup area 503a in step S216. To remember.

  Thereafter, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). In step S218, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the RAM access is prohibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  The process in step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal process of the main controller 261, the occurrence information of the power interruption is confirmed at the end of each process, so that the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is less than that in the middle of each process. And can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent data from being changed when the power is shut off, and to reliably store the state before the power is shut off. .

  Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the fluctuation interval period set after the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is a variable interval period, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted in step S802, and then this process ends. That is, for example, when the variable interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and “249 (“ 250 ”in the case where step S802 is performed before step S801)” is set in the variable interval timer. In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is not a variable interval period, in step S803, a hit situation storage area to be described later is referred to in detail, and a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state is now It is determined whether or not.

  During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit in the special display devices 43a and 43b is stopped and displayed until the first or second variable winning device 32a or 32b is opened, A special display device after the round period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, the interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and the final round There is an ending period until the variable display of 43a and 43b can be started.

  In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, “0” is stored in a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state, and in the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is stored during the opening period and the interval period. “2” is stored during the round period, and “3” is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S803, it is determined whether or not “0” is stored in the winning status storage area, and whether or not the big hit state or the small hit state is being determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect, the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S803, details will be described later in step S804. It is determined whether the first or second special display device 43a, 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is in a variable display mode by looking at the setting state of the special figure display flag. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered that the variable display is being stopped. . As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, and the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b. Turned off when the variable display is stopped.

  When a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, when neither the big hit state or the small hit state is in addition to the variable display, the process proceeds to step S805, where both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are displayed. , The display mode corresponding to the change standby state in which the change display is not performed (for example, the first and second first special figure lamps 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 from the right in the lower row only). The standby display setting for deriving the lighting mode) is performed. That is, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment are maintained after the suspension of the fluctuation for the fluctuation interval period (in a manner indicating the result of the lottery). However, when the variable interval period ends, the display mode is switched to indicate the variable standby state.

  After step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the hold number of the second variable display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b is greater than “0”. Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S806, that is, if even one second variation display is held, 1 is subtracted from the second hold counter Nb in step S807. In the present embodiment, when the second variation display is held and stored by the determination processing in step S806, the second variation display is executed without executing the first variation display. In other words, even when the first variation display is stored on hold earlier than the second variation display, the second variation display is preferentially digested (the first variation display is postponed). ing.

  In a succeeding step S808, a process for shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S808, in step S809, subtraction display processing of the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the second variation display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the pair of left and right second hold lamps 404 are blinking, the right second hold lamp 404 is lit while the left second hold lamp 404 is blinking, and the left second hold lamp 404 is turned on. When 404 is blinking and the second hold lamp 404 on the right side is lit, both the left and right second hold lamps 404 are lit, and when both the left and right second hold lamps 404 are lit. When the second hold lamp 404 on the right side is turned off while the second hold lamp 404 on the left side is turned on, the second hold lamp 404 on the left side is lit and the second hold lamp 404 on the right side is turned off. , A process for turning off both the left and right second holding lamps 404 is performed.

  After step S809, in step S810, a variable display setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S806, that is, if no second variation display is stored, the first variation triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a in step S811. It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na for counting the number of hold of display is greater than zero.

  If a negative determination is made in step S811, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S811, 1 is subtracted from the first hold counter Na in step S812. In a succeeding step S813, a process for shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area.

  After step S813, in step S814, subtraction display processing of the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) corresponding to the decrease in the number of hold of the first variation display by 1 is performed. That is, when both the left and right pair of first hold lamps 403 are blinking, the right side first hold lamp 403 is turned on while the left side first hold lamp 403 is blinked, and the left side first hold lamp 403 is turned on. When 403 is flashing and the first hold lamp 403 on the right side is lit, both the left and right first hold lamps 403 are turned on, and when both the left and right first hold lamps 403 are lit. When the left first hold lamp 403 is turned on and the right first hold lamp 403 is turned off, the left first hold lamp 403 is turned on and the right first hold lamp 403 is turned off. , A process for turning off both the left and right first holding lamps 403 is performed.

  After step S814, the variable display setting process is performed in step S810, and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the execution area of the special variable reservation area is one, and the data stored in the first special variable reservation area and the second special variable reservation area are displayed when the variable display based on the data is performed. Therefore, it is shifted to a common execution area.

  Here, details of the variable display setting process in step S810 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S901, a mode storage area to be described later is referred to in detail to determine whether or not a high probability state (probability change mode or latent probability mode) is set. In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, “22”, “11” corresponds to the normal mode, and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is obtained by determining whether or not “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, in the case of a high probability state (probability change mode, latent probability mode), in step S902, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable hold area is referred to, It is determined whether or not one of the first and second success / failure flags (see the success / failure determination process in FIG. 14) is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the high-probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is set, in step S903, whether or not the first success / failure flag is turned on in consideration of the success / failure random number storage area. Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that a big win is won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, a jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is set on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot confirmation flag.

  In the following step S905, whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not the second variation flag is turned on in consideration of the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area, is displayed to the second start winning device 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the entry of the ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S905, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON in step S906 in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable hold area. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if “16RS”, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing fluctuation display for teaching the occurrence of “16RS”, and is based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Variation patterns of the display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42 (variable display time, variation display stop mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the decorative symbol display device 42, variation display effect patterns of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. ), And setting of a variation pattern command and a symbol command is performed based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2 and the variation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S909. After step S909, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S908, it is determined in step S910 whether the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S910, a 2RN30 pattern setting process is performed in step S911. After step S911, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Further, if a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S912, a 2RN60 pattern setting process is performed in step S913. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, if the 2RN90 flag is set on, a 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variation display performed this time is the first variation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination with the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable suspension area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, a 16RS pattern setting process is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process proceeds to step S931 described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S915, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the 8RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S917, that is, if “8RS”, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S918. After step S918, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S919, an 8RN pattern setting process is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, if the 2RS flag is set on, a 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

  Also, if a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the winning lottery is won in the high-probability state, a small amount indicating that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed in step S923. Set the hit confirmation flag on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to confirming the occurrence of the small hit state in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit determination flag. Thereafter, in step S924, a small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, if the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is considered, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, if it is determined that a small win has been won in the winning lottery in a low probability state, a small hit determination flag is set on in step S923, and in step S924 After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, if neither big win nor small win is found, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (FIG. It is determined whether or not (see 17 reach determination processing) is ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S926, that is, in the case of “rearward / rearward reach”, a front / rear reach pattern setting process is performed in step S927, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  If a negative determination is made in step S926, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the other than front and rear flags are on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S928, that is, if “reach other than front / rear out”, a reach pattern setting process other than front / rear is performed in step S929, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S928, that is, if it is “completely off”, a deviation variation pattern setting process is performed in step S930, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

  In step S931, a special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43a and 43b is set to ON. Thereby, it is shown that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) is established in the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the subsequent step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the variation time (the remaining time of variation display) in the special display devices 43a and 43b is set. The special figure display timer is considered when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

  In addition, the value corresponding to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set as the variation display time of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the present embodiment. Based on the setting of the special figure display timer, when a control signal for starting the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the next external output process of the normal process. In the special display devices 43a and 43b, switching display (variation display) is started. The sub-control device 262 that has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts variation display in the decorative symbol display device 42 based on the variation pattern command simultaneously with the start of variation of the special display devices 43a and 43b. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by a combination of symbols based on the symbol command. After step S932 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, a process for acquiring the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 and storing it in the special fluctuation hold area, a success / failure determination process in steps S506 and 513, and a variable display setting. In the process, the winning / raising lottery is constituted by the processing of steps S901 to S903, step S922, and step S925 for determining whether or not the winning / failure flag and the small hit flag are determined based on the situation at that time. In addition, the second determination processing is configured by the processing of steps S901 to S903, S922, S925, and the like, and includes steps S907, S909, S911, step S913, step S914, step S916, step S918, step S920, step S921, The variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S927, step S929, and step S930.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S815, and the special figure display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), “2500” is set for the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S816, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed in consideration of the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step S816 when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S816, switching display setting is performed in step S821 to continue the switching display (variation display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43a and 43b is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

  Further, in step S822, the lighting state of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b (the first hold lamp 403 and the second hold lamp 404) (in this example, both the left and right lamps are turned off, left Only lighting, both lighting, left flashing, right lighting, or both flashing) is set, and then the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S816, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S817, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display in the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed in step S818. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43a and 43b in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type or loss set in the variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a control signal to stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub-control device 262. Accordingly, the stop timings of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the decorative symbol display device 42, and the sub display device 411 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the symbol command or the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, information regarding the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 is again obtained. There is no need to add. Again, the display is mainly the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative symbols by the decorative symbol display device 42 is only auxiliary (for production). Yes.

  Subsequently, in step S819, after performing discrimination information setting processing for initializing the hit state and measuring the time reduction mode period, in step S820, the variable interval timer is set to a variable interval period (for example, 1 second). After the corresponding value is set, this process ends. Here, the discrimination information setting process in step S819 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S1001, the success / failure random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the 16RS flag is set on in consideration of the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, “16” is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) in step S1003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set on.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, if the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, “8” is set to the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, “1” is set for the winning situation storage area. In the subsequent step S1007, a value “2000” corresponding to an opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set for a special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening / closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b). Set. Subsequently, in step S1008, 8 pieces that are the maximum number of balls entered per round are calculated with respect to a prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first and second variable prize-winning devices 32a and 32b. “8” shown is set. It should be noted that the value of the winning counter indicates whether the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b have been entered in the first and second count switches 223a during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. 223b, and 1 is subtracted when it is determined that there is a ball entering the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b.

  Then, in step S1009, an opening command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the hit state is set. The opening command includes hit type information and the like, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state. After step S1009, this process ends.

  In addition, in the jackpot state, the promotion effect of the appearance of the jackpot type, etc. (for example, when an even number of blue eyes are stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, “8RS” or “16RS” is won in the jackpot state immediately after Or instructing that “16RS” has been won in the jackpot state immediately after the odd symbol is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area in the execution area of the special variable holding area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1010 (small hit), or an affirmative determination is made in step S1004 (“2RS” or “2RN”), “2” is set in the round number counter in step S1011. Set. After step S1011, in step S1012, "1" is set for the winning situation storage area. In subsequent step S1013, for example, a value “500” corresponding to an opening period of 2 seconds is set for the special variable timer, in step S1014, “8” is set for the winning counter, and in step S1015, the opening is performed. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If neither the big hit nor the small win is determined and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode is set. It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1016, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1016, in step S1017, 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation counter in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, at the end of the big hit state of “8RN”, “2RN30”, “2RN60”, and “2RN90”, the fluctuation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is shown for each fluctuation counter. Each time the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) is performed once, 1 is subtracted in step S1010.

  In a succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, the variation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (decorative symbol display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is still performed at the end of the hit state. If not, the process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, “11” indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1019. That is, when the variable display is performed a specified number of times in the special display devices 43a and 43b, the time reduction mode ends and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, a short-time end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode, and then the process ends. In the present embodiment, the process for performing the initial setting for the small hit state and the process for performing the initial setting for the 2RS and 2RN big hit states are shared, but may be performed separately.

  Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning situation storage area is “0”, thereby determining whether the state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the jackpot state or the jackpot state is not reached, this processing is terminated as it is. Incidentally, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, “1” is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

  On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is in effect (when any of “1” to “3” is set in the hit state storage area), step S1202 is performed. In step S1, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation holding area. If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203 and 1 is subtracted from the value of the special variable timer. Incidentally, “2000” or “500” is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state.

  In a succeeding step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not “1” is set in the winning situation storage area.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, “2” is set for the winning situation storage area in step S1206. In a succeeding step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. Here, any of “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, which is a big hit with a ball that can be awarded when winning in the winning lottery performed with the first start winning device 33a as a trigger. It is determined whether or not it exists (whether it is other than “2RS”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value “7500” corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for which the first variable winning device 32a is kept open is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value “100” corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a for the special variable timer. Set.

  After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, the first variable winning device 32a is opened, and in step S1211, the sub-control device 262 is notified of information indicating that a round is to be started. Set the command. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are completed and the ending period is started, “3” is set for the hit state storage area. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is not yet time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step S1213.

  In a succeeding step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there is still a round to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and “1” is set for the hit situation storage area. Thereafter, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, in step S1217, a value “1000” corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, a value “250” corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1218.

  After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, “8” is set to the winning counter. Further, in step S1220, a process for closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for informing the sub-control device 262 that the interval is to be started is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, if there remains a time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the first variable winning device 32a, the process proceeds to step S1222. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is “0”. The winning counter is set to “8”, which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of winnings per round at the start of the big win state or the small win state and at the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted every time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1222, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, that is, if a round end opportunity has come without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process proceeds to step S1213. As a result, if eight game balls have entered the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round will end immediately at that point even if the opening period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, when all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1223, and “3” is set for the hit state storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a ball. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1224, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1225. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1224, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1226.

  After step S1225 or step S1226, “7” is set to the winning counter in step S1227. Note that when the process of setting the ending after step S1223 is performed in the flow after the positive determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. If the value of the winning counter is set to “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, an affirmative determination is made in step S1222 in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, so that the ending period is completed. Can not. For this reason, a tentative numerical value other than “0” (“7” in this example) is entered in the winning counter in step S1227 to complete the ending period. Of course, the ending period may be completed by another method.

  After step S1227, in step S1228, the first variable winning device 32a is closed, and in subsequent step S1229, an ending command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that ending is to be started. . Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, that is, if it is time to end the jackpot state after the ending period ends, the process proceeds to step S1230 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, a mode storage area and a variation counter are set.

  Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON by referring to the execution random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable suspension area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1401, in step S1402, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variable holding area is referred to and it is determined whether or not the 8RN flag is set on.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, a value “12” corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the end of the big hit state.

  In the subsequent step S1404, “90” is set to the variation counter. The variation counter is a display of variation for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when “12” is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for grasping. After step S1404, in step S1415, a short time start command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the start of the time reduction mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1405 whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set on with reference to the winning type random number storage area in the execution area. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1403, as in the case where the 8RN flag is set on.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1405, it is determined in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1406, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1407, “60” is set in the variation counter in step S1408, and a time reduction start command is set in step S1415. After this is set, this process ends.

  Furthermore, if a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1409, “12” is set in the mode storage area in step S1410, “30” is set in the variation counter in step S1411, and a time reduction start command is set in step S1415. After this is set, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1409, it is determined in step S1412 whether the 2RS flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent probability start command for notifying the sub control device 262 of the start of the latent probability mode is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1412, "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probability variation mode is given after the end of the big hit state. After step S1414, in step S1417, a probability change start command is set to notify the sub control device 262 of the start of the probability change mode. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 22, after step S1230, in step S1231, “0” indicating that the hit state storage area is not the big hit state or the small hit state is set. Thereafter, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to inform the sub-control device 262 that the big hit state or the small hit state is to be ended, and then this processing is ended. The hit end command includes the number information of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

  Note that the second variable prize-winning device control process in step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10) is basically the second variable prize-winning device 32b as the target of the opening / closing control with respect to the first variable prize-winning device control process. This is executed when the second variation flag is set on, and the only difference is whether or not it is 16RS or 8RS when determining whether or not it is a big hit with a ball. To do.

  Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal time interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the normal time interval period set after the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is a normal interval period, in step S2102, the value of the normal interval timer is subtracted, and then this process ends. That is, for example, the usual interval period is set to 1 second (1000 msec), and “249 (“ 250 ”when step S2102 is performed before step S2101”) is set in the usual interval timer. In this case, in the processing, the value of the usual interval timer is subtracted by “1” every 4 msec and becomes “0” after 1 second.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is not the normal symbol interval period, in step S2103, the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display is displayed. Determine whether it is on. When the normal figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in a variable display.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process proceeds to step S2104, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, this processing is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, if no change display of the normal symbol display device 41 is held, the present process is terminated. For example, if a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to the variable standby state in which the variable display is not performed. It is good. In other words, the normal symbol display device 41, after the suspension of fluctuation, will be maintained during the usual figure interval period (in the form showing the result of the entrance support lottery), but the usual figure interval period ends. Then, you may comprise so that it may switch to the display mode which shows that it is a fluctuation waiting state.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105.

  In a succeeding step S2106, a process for shifting the data stored in the normal variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normally variable holding area to the execution area side. The holding first area → the execution area, the holding second area → The data in each area is shifted such as the first hold area, the third hold area → the second hold area, the fourth hold area → the third hold area.

  After that, in step S2107, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is set and the normal figure fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

  Here, the common map variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol display device 41 is performing the variable display is turned on. In subsequent step S2302, the winning situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not “0” is stored, that is, whether the current state is a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if neither the big hit state nor the small hit state is set, whether or not a value of “12” or “21” is stored in the mode storage area in step S2303. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a high pitched state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the fluctuation of the normal symbol display device 41 is compared with the normal symbol display timer that measures the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed in the normal symbol display device 41. “100” is set to set the display time to 0.4 seconds.

  Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “0”. It should be noted that in the high pitching state, the winning is made when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1 to 99”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if a winning ballot support lottery indicating whether or not the second start winning device 33b is to be opened is won, it is determined in step S2306 that the winning ball winning support lottery has been won. Turn on the indicated entry support flag. After step S2306 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, this process ends.

  In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low entry state, in step S2307, a normal symbol is displayed with respect to the general symbol display timer. “2000” is set in order to set the variable display time of 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation holding area is “1”. In the low entry state, the winning symbol is won when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 taking a value in the range of “0 to 99” is “1”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery is won, in step S2309, the incoming support flag indicating that the winning support lottery has been won is set on. After step S2309 or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2107, in step S2108, the subtraction display of the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) corresponding to the fact that the number of variable display hold of the normal symbol display device 41 has decreased by one. Process. That is, if both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are blinking, the right normal hold lamp 406 is turned on while the left normal hold lamp 406 is blinking, and the left normal hold lamp 406 is blinking. If the right normal hold lamp 406 is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned on. If both the left and right normal hold lamps 406 are turned on, the left side normal hold lamp 406 is turned on. When the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off and the normal hold lamp 406 on the left side is lit and the normal hold lamp 406 on the right side is turned off, both the right and left normal hold lamps 406 are turned off. To perform the process. After step S2108, this process ends.

  If the determination in step S2103 is affirmative, that is, if the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process advances to step S2109 to perform processing for subtracting the general symbol display timer. Each time this processing is performed once, the count value of the general-purpose display timer is decremented by one.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, where it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal display timer is “0”, that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2110, the normal symbol display flag is turned off in step S2111, and a normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2112. That is, when winning (when the entrance support flag is set to ON), both the left and right general-purpose lamps 405 are turned on, and when left off, only the left-side general-purpose lamps 405 are turned on. Let

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2113 to perform a general-purpose discrimination information setting process. Here, the common figure discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entrance support flag is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning device 33b is in an open state is set on.

  In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not any one of “12, 21” is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is a high pitching state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 4 with respect to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning device 33b. Set "1000" to seconds.

  Furthermore, in step S2405, “3” is set to open the second start winning device 33b three times with respect to the opening number counter for counting the number of times (the remaining number of times) the second starting winning device 33b is opened. After step S2405, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Furthermore, in step S2410, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if there is a low pitching state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second start winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. “100” is set. In step S2407, “1” is set to the opening number counter so that the second start winning device 33b is opened once. After step S2407, the pitch support flag is turned off in step S2408, the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409, and the second start winning device 33b is set in the open state in step S2410. This process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2113, in step S2114, a value corresponding to a normal interval period (for example, 1 second) is set in the normal interval timer, and then the present process ends.

  If the determination in step S2110 is negative, in step S2115, a switching display for continuously performing the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 (switching display for alternately turning on the pair of left and right universal lamps 405). Set up. Based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next external output processing in the normal processing. As a result, the normal display control processing timing, that is, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized every 4 ms.

  Furthermore, in step S2116, the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406) is turned on (in this example, both the left and right lamps are both turned off, left turned on, both turned on, left blinking, right turned on, both blinked). Any one) is set, and then this process is terminated.

  Next, the start winning device control process of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, 1 is subtracted from the value of the normal variable timer in step S2202. In the following step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, if the predetermined opening time of the second starting prize-winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2205, and the normal variable flag is turned off. In subsequent step S2206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the number-of-opening counter, and in step S2207, setting is made to close the second start winning device 33b.

  Thereafter, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-releases counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery is performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, the second start winning device 33b is released three times based on it. If there is a remaining number of times, a value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second start winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in a closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, if the interval period has not yet elapsed, the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2211, the normal variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value ("1000" in this example) corresponding to the open time is set for the normal variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, the second start winning device 33b is set to be in an open state, and then this process is terminated.

  Next, payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will be described first with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interruption when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, the other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is temporarily waited, and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3001 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and ends this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as illustrated in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received. If a command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by confirming a port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port at predetermined intervals.

  Next, main processing of the payout control apparatus 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311. This main process is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

  First, in step S3101, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. In step S3103, the RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

  Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the information on occurrence of power interruption is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in step S3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address in the RAM 513. It should be noted that it is possible to determine the effectiveness of backup based on whether or not the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

  If no power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by a RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

  In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit interruption.

  On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106 and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at the time of power recovery (at the time of power failure recovery) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, power-off occurrence information is cleared in step S3110, and a payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared in step S3111. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized. In step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. In step S3114, an interrupt is permitted.

  After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in the process of step S3122 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on occurrence of power supply interruption is set, the power supply is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as a power failure process at the time of power supply interruption. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and a command determination process described later is executed in the next step S3124. Thereafter, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 513.

  Note that since the process of step S3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power-off after the process performed at the time of turning on the power, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the middle of each process. Less and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

  Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28).

  If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is OFF, a new command has not been received from the main control device 261, and thus this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

  The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of step S3304 to step S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command. In step S3305, it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command. In step S3306, it is determined whether the command is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

  If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. If the payout permission flag has been turned off, the main power is turned on. Since the initialization of the RAM 513 is instructed from the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission for the winning ball is set.

  As described above, the main controller 261 performs initialization processing of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes processing of the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially at the same time. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to a shift in the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. The occurrence of adverse effects can be prevented. In addition, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout allowance for prize balls.

  On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization process of the RAM 513. That is, the processing in step S3307 prohibits initialization of the RAM 513 with the payout permission flag set. The payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on. Therefore, the payout initialization command is not received in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value setting of the RAM 513 (step S3309) is executed in a state where the payout permission flag is turned on, the payout is not made when a prize ball remains. Although an adverse effect occurs and causes a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Further, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cut-off. In order to permit the payout of the prize ball, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on occurrence of power interruption and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power interruption, the payout of the prize ball is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Further, if the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads out the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since a prize ball corresponding to the number of prize balls is paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the prize ball to be paid out. . In addition, when a winning ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the winning ball can be paid out early for winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is changed to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

  Note that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), is not a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is terminated without turning on the payout permission flag.

  Returning to the flowchart of FIG. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent award balls from being paid out before a command is transmitted from the main controller 261.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204, and the state return operation is determined to be started. Perform a return operation. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 358a, for example, the payout motor 358a is rotated forward and reverse to eliminate the ball jam (return to the normal state). Figured.

  Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full state or the lower plate full release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the state of the lower plate 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch. When the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set. When the lower plate is not full, the lower plate full state is released. Execute the setting. In step S3206, setting of a tank ball absence state (out of ball state) or a tank ball absence release state (ball state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and the special setting for the absence of the tank ball and the setting for the no tank ball state are executed. Perform configuration.

  Thereafter, in step S3207, for example, the presence / absence of a state to be notified, such as an error state, is determined.

  Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

  In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to execute the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on the condition that the ball removal disabled state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, the control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

  Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input / output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received.

  If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. When commands are stored in all storage areas, the ring buffer is at the start of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

  In a succeeding step S3903, a hold information storage process is performed in which information on the advance command output from the main control device 261 is stored in a hold information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262. The starting command includes, as described above, information indicating which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is a variable display triggered by the winning, and variable information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether or not there is, information indicating the type of jackpot, and information indicating the type of reach are included.

  The hold information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is similar to the special variable hold area of the main control device 261. The first hold information storage area and the second hold information area each having four hold areas (holding first to fourth holding areas). A holding information storage area and one execution area are provided. In the first hold information storage area, information on whether or not a big hit, a jackpot type, a small hit is made according to the reception history of the starting command based on the first fluctuation display (information stored in the first special fluctuation hold area). Information on whether or not and information on fluctuation display such as reach type (fluctuation information) are stored in time series. In the second hold information storage area, the change information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the second change display (information stored in the second special change hold area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by entering the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by entering the second start winning device 33b. Four pieces of fluctuation information regarding each can be stored on hold. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special change reservation areas of the main control device 261 but also the change information stored in the reservation area. .

  Hereinafter, the hold information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a starting command has been received (whether or not the starting command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If a negative determination is made in step S 4101, the present process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, whether or not the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area) in step S4102. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the first start winning device 33a (variation information stored in the first special variation holding area), in step S4103 The first fluctuation hold counter Nd that counts the number of fluctuation information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4104, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, information on the reach type, etc. are stored in the vacant holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store in the first area.

  In subsequent step S4105, notice information storage processing is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, there may be intentional derivations of effects related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to perform continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first hold information. Among the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step S4104.

  The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 49) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The continuous notice counter is periodically updated, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

  The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 9) and then returns to 0 that is the lower limit. The notice type counter is periodically updated, and each time the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

  In the advance notice storage process, when the variation information is stored in the hold information storage area, the values of the continuous advance notice counter and the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each of the holding area and the execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notice is derived.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success / failure determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to carry out continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when determining the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notice determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice determination table and the advance notice table to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

  After step S4105, in step S4106, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. In the present embodiment, the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106 constitutes the specific effect determining process.

  In the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, when the value of the first variable hold counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area, Whether or not to execute the continuous notice is determined by referring to the notice success / failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type and the game mode. Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the continuous notice, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach type, or game mode based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first hold information storage area To determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flag is turned on for all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

  After step S4106, in step S4107, in the lower left part (holding display area) of the decorative symbol display device 42, a holding icon setting process for additionally displaying one holding icon indicating that the variable display is held is stored. After this, this process is terminated. A plurality of patterns are prepared as display patterns such as the state of the hold icon and how to display it (the aspect changes in the middle). Furthermore, the display pattern of the hold icon is associated with the winning expectation degree for the occurrence of the jackpot state (expected expectation of jackpot), and the expectation of the jackpot is suggested by the display pattern of the hold icon (pre-read hold notice effect is performed). It is configured as follows.

  That is, in the hold icon setting process, the value of the icon lottery random number counter (for example, 0 to 199) used when determining the display pattern of the hold icon is acquired, and the corresponding hold area in the hold information storage area is held. The icon lottery random number counter stored in the hold icon storage area is stored with reference to the hold icon pattern storage table that stores the correspondence between the icon lottery random number counter value and the hold icon display pattern. Based on the value, the display pattern of the hold icon is determined. The hold icon pattern storage table is for jackpots that are considered in correspondence with variation information that teaches jackpots, for those that are considered in correspondence with variation information that will be out of front and back, and for those that are not back and forth A hold icon pattern storage table that is referred to according to the change information included in the preceding command, that is, one for non-before / after that is referred to corresponding to the change information to be reached, and one for other (complete release). Is selected. And the process of displaying the hold icon of the determined display pattern so that it may arrange in the right side of the rightmost thing among the hold icons currently displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 42 is performed.

  However, in the present embodiment, the hold icon corresponds to either the first variation display based on the entry to the first start winning device 33a or the second variation display based on the entry to the second start winning device 33b. It is a common aspect in which it is not specified whether it is what to do. In addition, if the transition of the lighting mode of the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b (the first hold lamp 403 and the second hold lamp 404) is confirmed, which start winning device 33a, 33b It is possible to determine whether the display is a variation display based on the entry of a game ball.

  Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, that is, when the starting command corresponds to a ball entering the second start winning device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation holding area). Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of pieces of change information held in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot, information on the reach type, etc. Store in the first area. In subsequent step S4110, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the reserved area in which the variation information is newly stored in step S4109 in the second reserved information storage area.

  After step S4110, in step S4111, a continuous notice lottery process for determining whether or not to execute a continuous notice is performed. The continuous notice lottery process in step S4111 only corresponds to the ball entering the second start winning device 33b in the continuous notice lottery process in step S4106, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4111, a hold icon setting process is performed in step S4112, and then this process ends.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905. If the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step S3914.

  In step S3905, various counter update processes are executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used for setting the out-of-place design symbols CO, the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly.

  The jackpot decoration symbol counter CO determines a symbol when the fluctuation symbol of the decoration symbol display device 42 stops when the jackpot state occurs (in this embodiment, as a jackpot decoration symbol counter CO). 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 8, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8), returns to 0.

  When the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 indicates that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is to be stopped, for example, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates the counter value with the decorative symbol) If it is 0, the combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as “1” (the doublet) and 1 if it is “2” (the doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as will be described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referred to at the timing when the symbol command is received. It may be.

  Also, when the symbol command indicates that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is to be stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0, 1, it is “2” (the doublet), and if it is 2-4, “4” ( The combination of jackpot symbols is determined in such a way that “6” (for the flat eye) if it is 5, 6 or “8” (for the flat eye) if it is 7, 8.

  The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combination of the stopped symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the winning or failing lottery is lost. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the column, nine (0 to 8) counter values are prepared for each. A stop symbol in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper symbol counter CL, a stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and a stop symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower symbol counter CR.

  In the present embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of these symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the reach / reverse symbol buffer of the RAM 553, the reach symbol buffer other than the front / rear out, and the complete Stored in one of the off symbol buffers.

  Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL. In step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be sequentially updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4001. If the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step S4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process proceeds to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If the update time of the medium symbol counter CM (step S4002 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (both steps S4001 and S4002 are NO), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower symbol counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

  According to the above-described CL, CM, and CR update processing, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in a single update process, and the update times of the counter values overlap. There is no. Thereby, every time the update process is executed three times, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is updated.

  Thereafter, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is determined that the combination is a reach symbol (YES in S4006), then in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are the same as the symbols in the middle symbol display area). Is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4007, this combination is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of symbols that are out of front and rear. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols that are out of front / rear (front / rear out of reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009 and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is The stored data is stored in the outreach symbol buffer and the process is terminated. If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of symbols other than front / rear detachment (reach other than front / rear detachment) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is combined. Is stored in the reach symbol buffer except for the back and forth detachment of the RAM 553, and the process is terminated.

  Further, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR is the combination of the off symbol (completely off symbol). The combination of the out-of-clock symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the complete out-of- symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a hold process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the hold process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command is received (whether or not the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if the variation information of the second variation display is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4203, and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by one.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. Never happen. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is suspended and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. For this reason, in this embodiment, in step S4202, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fluctuation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, so that the fluctuation pattern command is displayed in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display. Which variation information is possessed is discriminated. Of course, the variation pattern command is provided with information indicating which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display is supported, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command is displayed in the first variation display and It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display is included.

  After step S4203, in step S4204, a process for shifting data stored in the first hold information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted, such as execution area, second hold area, first hold area, third hold area, second hold area, fourth hold area, third hold area. After step S4204, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4202, that is, if even one piece of change information of the second change display is held, the value of the second change hold counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4205.

  In a succeeding step S4206, a process for shifting the data stored in the second reserved information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area to the execution area side. The hold first area → the execution area, the hold second Data in each area is shifted, such as area → holding first area, holding third area → holding second area, holding fourth area → holding third area. After step S4206, the process proceeds to step S4207. In the present embodiment, there is one execution area for the hold information storage area, and the data stored in the first hold information storage area and the second hold information storage area is displayed with a variable display corresponding to the data. Will be shifted to a common execution area.

  In step S4207, a notice setting process for determining the type of display effect used for continuous notice is performed. In the advance notice setting process in step S4207, it is determined whether or not the continuous advance notice flag (see the continuous advance notice lottery process in step S4106) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on. Since this is not performed, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit, what is the type if it is a big win, and what is the reach type if it is not a big hit, etc. The type of continuous notice is determined with reference to the corresponding table. The type of continuous notice determined here is derived at a predetermined timing when the corresponding change display is performed.

  After step S4207, in step S4208, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. Each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a holding icon storage area for storing the type of the holding icon, and information related to the holding icon is also stored in the above holding information storage area. It is shifted by data shift processing. The hold icon shift process is a process for redrawing the hold icon in accordance with the data shift. In the decorative symbol display device 42, every time one variable display is consumed (executed), the leftmost icon shift process is performed. The hold icon located at is deleted, and the hold icon arranged on the right side of the hold icon is shifted to the left (the display location moves).

  After step S4208, this process ends. In the present embodiment, since the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, such a first variation is performed when continuous notice is given for a plurality of first variation displays. If there is a ball entering the second start winning device 33b during the display variation display, the second variation display may interrupt between the plurality of first variation displays, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even during normal variable display when the continuous notice is not performed (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. For this reason, even if the continuous notice is interrupted, there is no sense of incongruity.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command are received, the sub control device 262 determines a display pattern and the like by referring to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, and the like. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined items to the display control device 45 as display commands.

  The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device. Note that once the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the symbol is coordinated with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Will continue to be displayed.

  Further, when starting the variable display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the hold information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process in step S4105) is on, each situation is determined based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command. Referring to the table corresponding to, the type of the continuous notice to be derived for the variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, or the display corresponding to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like is performed. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process in step S3907, a process for performing effect control during a big hit or a small hit (a hit display process) is also performed.

  Here, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control device 261 to notify the start of the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4701, in step S4702, the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds is set to “16” if it is “16RS” based on the information included in the opening command. Set “8” for “8RS” and “8RN”, and “2” for “2RS”, “2RN”, and “small hit”.

  Thereafter, in step S4703, if there is a big hit with a ball, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative symbol display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this process is performed. finish. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like for storing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various rendering modes in the jackpot state. Select and let it run.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether a round command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if there is a big hit with a ball, an effect during a round of 30 seconds at the maximum is set, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4706, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and if it is a big hit with a ball in step S4708, the effect is set during the 4-second interval, and then this process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4706, it is determined in step S4709 whether an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if a big hit with a ball is set in step S4711, an ending effect is set for 10 seconds, and then this process ends.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit or a small win other than a big hit with a ball, an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period ( Instead of setting an effect by dividing each period (such as 1 second), settings are made so that an effect (announcement, etc.) is performed throughout the entire period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4712 whether a hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4712, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4712, the ending display is immediately ended in step S4713, and the normal gaming state mode in which the variable display is performed is set. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3907, in step S3908, processing (sub display device setting processing) for controlling lighting of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) of the composite display device unit 40 is performed. Here, the sub display device setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received from the main controller 261. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, it is determined in step S7102 whether or not a sub lamp fluctuation flag indicating that the sub display device 411 is in a variable display (switching display of the sub lamp 417 to be lit) is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S7102, it is determined in step S7103 whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 261.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if a variation pattern command is received, variation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special lamps 401 and 402) included in the variation pattern command is stored in step S7104. Perform the process.

  In a succeeding step S7105, a process for starting the variable display of the sub display device 411 (a fluctuation start process of the sub lamp 417) is performed. In the variation start process of the sub lamp 417, the variation pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined based on the variation information of the special figure lamps 401 and 402. In this embodiment, the mode of the sub lamp 417 corresponding to the determined variation pattern is derived. It is supposed to be.

  The display mode of the composite display device unit 40 will be described. For example, when the variable display of the first special display device 43a is performed, the display is composed of a first special figure lamp 401 and sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right. A series of lighting modes is derived by 14 LEDs arranged in 2 vertical rows × 7 horizontal rows (hereinafter also referred to as “first variation display LEDs”). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46A, the lighting (fluctuation) pattern in which the LEDs to be lit are sequentially turned clockwise, and the LEDs to be lit are in the upper row as shown in FIG. 46B. There is a lighting (fluctuation) pattern in which lighting is performed sequentially from the left end to the right end, then sequentially lighting from the left end to the right end of the lower row, and again sequentially from the left end to the right end of the upper row.

  However, in the variation display of the first special display device 43a, at least one of the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamp 417 (first variation display LED) arranged on the left and right thereof is turned on. 1 Special figure lamp 401 shall be comprised so that it may be in a lighting state. That is, in the present embodiment, two of the first variation display LEDs are configured to be lit at the same time, so that both light modes change similarly (one light mode). Is configured to follow the other light mode), and when one of the sub lamps 417 is lit among the first variation display LEDs, one first special figure lamp 401 is also lit. It is supposed to be. Of the first variation display LEDs, two first special figure lamps 401 are lit, and no sub-lamp 417 is lit.

  Further, for example, when the variable display of the second special display device 43b is performed, the second special display lamp 402 and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides thereof are arranged in 2 vertical rows × 7 horizontal rows. A series of lighting modes are derived by the 14 LEDs (hereinafter also referred to as “second variation display LEDs”). The variation display of the second special display device 43b is also controlled to be turned on similarly to the variation display of the first special display device 43a.

  That is, in step S7105, it is determined which one corresponds to the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, and which of the two fluctuation patterns of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 is selected. By determining whether or not there is a change display, the sub lamp control table that is referred to when the lighting control of the sub lamp 417 is performed when the variable display is performed is selected. Note that a fluctuation specifying flag indicating whether the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display is supported may be provided, and the setting process of the fluctuation specifying flag may be performed in step S7105.

  In the present embodiment, the main process of the main control device 261 is performed every 4 msec and the normal process of the sub display device 262 is performed every 2 msec. Therefore, the corresponding first special figure lamp 401 or second special figure lamp is used. While one signal is sent to 402, two signals are sent to the corresponding sub lamp 417 (in the sub lamp control table, the same signal is repeatedly output twice) It is configured.

  After step S7105, the sub lamp fluctuation flag is set to ON in step S7106. In a succeeding step S7107, a covering shutter position setting process for determining the arrangement of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) is performed. The arrangement pattern of the covering shutter 441 includes a pattern in which both the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are in the covering position, a pattern in which both are in the exposure position, and the first shutter 442 in the covering position. There are a pattern in which the second shutter 443 is in the exposed position and a pattern in which the first shutter 442 is in the exposed position and the second shutter 443 is in the covering position. In the present embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are basically set to the exposure positions during the first variation display and the second variation display, and in step S7107, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are exposed. When it is determined that the second shutter 443 is displaced to the covering position, the corresponding first shutter 442 and second shutter 443 are moved to the covering position in accordance with the stop display of the first variation display and the second variation display. It is configured to be displaced.

  After step S7107, in step S7108, a process of determining a stop display pattern of the sub lamp 417 (sub lamp stop pattern setting process) is executed. As described above, the stop mode of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is the lighting pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 (the special figure lamps 401 and 402 that are turned on). It is configured to teach either the winning type of each jackpot, the winning jackpot, or being out of play, and a stop mode (lighting pattern) indicating each item. ) Are also available in multiple patterns. For example, regarding the first special display device 43a, eight patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “16RS” has been won, and eight patterns 1 to 8 are provided as patterns indicating that “8RS” has been won. Patterns are prepared, eight patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “2S” has been won, and eight patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “8RN” has been selected. Eight patterns of patterns 1 to 8 are prepared as patterns indicating that “winning” is won, and 32 patterns of patterns 1 to 32 are prepared as patterns indicating “off”.

  That is, the variation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b included in the variation pattern command includes not only information on which of the two variation patterns of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, Information about the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 is also included.

  The sub control device 262 is provided with a plurality of sub lamp pattern determination tables that are referred to when determining the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417. Further, for example, in the case of patterns 1 to 4 indicating that the stop pattern of the first special display device is won as “16RS”, the first sub lamp pattern determination table is referred to, and the stop pattern of the first special display device is referred to. In the case of patterns 5 to 8 indicating that “16RS” has been won, the second sub-lamp pattern determination table is referred to, and patterns 1 to 1 indicating that the stop pattern of the first special display device is “off”. In the case of pattern 8, the stop pattern of the first special display device and the sub lamp pattern determination table to be referred to are associated with each other, for example, the first sub lamp pattern determination table is referred to.

  In step S7108, the sub lamp pattern determination table to be referred to is determined according to the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, and the sub lamp pattern determination table is referred to, The value of the sub lamp pattern determination random number counter used when determining the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is acquired, and the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined based on the value of the sub lamp pattern determination random number counter.

  In the present embodiment, after determining the arrangement of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443), the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined (that is, when the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined) The arrangement of the covering shutter 441 must be taken into consideration so that the sub lamp 417 is not hidden by the covering shutter 441. For example, after the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is determined, The arrangement of the covering shutter 441 may be determined.

  In this embodiment, even if the stop mode of the first variation display LED (second variation display LED) looks the same, the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 (second special figure lamp 402) is the same. May be different. That is, FIG. 45A in which the first shutter 442 is in the covering position and the second shutter 443 is in the exposure position, and FIG. 45 (in which the first shutter 442 is in the exposure position and the second shutter 443 is in the covering position. In b), the state of the LED which is in the lit state among the first variation display LEDs that are visible is the same (the first variation display LED is in the visible range, both of which are leftmost. The upper and lower rows of the row, the upper row of the third row from the left, the lower row of the fourth row from the left, the upper row of the fifth row from the left, and the upper and lower rows of the rightmost row are lit). The combination of lighting of the figure lamp 401 is different.

  Therefore, the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 as the first mode shown in FIG. 45 (a) corresponds to “8RS” as the first result, and the second mode shown in FIG. 45 (b). The stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 corresponds to “8RN” as the second result, and even if a different result of the lottery determination is taught, the composite display device unit 40 (first special figure lamp 40 When the first combined mode and the second combined mode) in which each stop pattern of the figure lamp 401 is combined with the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 are visually recognized, the appearance may be similar to each other. . That is, the display position (combination of the special figure lamps 401, 402 to be lit and the sub lamp 417 to be lit) in which the special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417 are combined is different in display position. As a display mode (a shape that is raised by a lighted LED), the same shape can be derived.

  In addition, the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 43 in the jackpot state of “8RS” and “8RN”, that is, the number of jackpot rounds and the end conditions of each round are the same. Furthermore, for teaching or suggesting that “8RS” has been won (corresponding to the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b for teaching that “8RS” has been won). In the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42, it was decided not to teach that “8RS” was won but to teach (imply) that either “8RS” or “8RN” was won. The variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 in this case is the same as the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 that teaches that “8RN” has been won. In addition, the effect on the decorative symbol display device 42 in the jackpot state performed in a state where it is not taught whether “8RS” or “8RN” is basically the same (in the jackpot state, actually, “ “Upgrading effect” that teaches that “8RS” has been won is performed, and when such an effect is successful, that is, when “8RS” is instructed, a different mode is used thereafter. Become). In addition, even if it is not taught whether it is “8RS” or “8RN” even at the end of the jackpot state, the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 in the subsequent normal game may be the same.

  After step S7108, in step S7109, the determined stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 is stored, and then this process ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if a stop command is received from the main controller 261, the sub lamp 417 is stopped in the stop pattern determined in step S7108 and stored in step S7109 in step S7110. Stop display processing to be displayed. As a result, the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 of the main display device 49 and the corresponding sub lamp 417 are stopped and displayed in synchronization.

  After step S7110, in step S7111, the sub lamp fluctuation flag is turned off. In step S7112, the teaching timer is set, and then the process ends. The teaching timer is for the sub-control device 262 to grasp the change interval period set after the stop display of the change display of the special display devices 43a and 43b in the main control device 261. In step S7112, A value corresponding to the length of the fluctuation interval (for example, 1 second) is set.

  If the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, in step S7113, the variable display of the sub display device 411 that is performed following the variable display of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b is continued. The switching display setting process is performed. That is, the process instructed by moving the pointer of the sub lamp control table one step ahead, that is, the process of turning on the corresponding one of the sub lamps 417 and turning off the others is performed. After step S7113, the process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7103, it is determined in step S7114 whether or not the value of the teaching timer is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S 7114, the value of the teaching timer is decremented by 1 in step S 7115, and then this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7114, in step S7116, the display mode of the sub display device 411 (lighting pattern of the sub lamp 417) is changed to the standby state (changes in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b). A standby display setting is performed to obtain a display mode corresponding to a state where no display is performed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 45, in this embodiment, the second special display lamp 402 (first special figure) is displayed in a state where the variable display of the second special display apparatus 43b (first special display apparatus 43a) is not performed. As the stand-by display on the lamp 401) side, the second right figure lamp 402 (first special figure lamp 401) in the lower rightmost row and the second rightmost row are turned on. On the other hand, in a state where the variable display of the second special display device 43b (first special display device 43a) is not performed, the standby display on the side of the sub lamp 417 is the first of the sub lamps 417 where the variable display is not performed. The sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right of the second special display device 43b (first special display device 43a) are turned off.

  After step S7116, in step S7117, the position of the covering shutter is reset (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are displaced to the exposure position), and then this process ends. In the present embodiment, the sub display device 411 constitutes sub display means, and the switching display in the sub display device 411 corresponds to pseudo display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3908, in step S3909, menu display processing is performed. In the present embodiment, the top menu screen can be opened by operating the effect button 125 in a state where the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is not performed. Various selection items such as “game history” and “volume setting” are displayed on the top menu screen, and the selection can be appropriately determined by operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126.

  In the subsequent lamp setting process in step S3910, the lighting pattern of the lamp / electrical accessories is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

  In the sound setting process of step S3911, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. In addition, when a voice-related command such as an error occurrence notification is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3911.

  In step S3912, the control setting of the customer waiting effect (for example, a demonstration screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses without the decorative symbol display device 42 being displayed); Perform the process.

  In step S3913, external output processing for transmitting a control signal based on the setting contents in steps S3905 to S3912 to each device is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  After the processing of steps S3905 to S3913 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3914, and whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 553 is determined. Is determined. The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from the main controller 261.

  If no power off occurrence information is stored, the process advances to step S3915 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 is destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3914 that the information about the occurrence of power interruption is stored, the power interruption process is executed in step S3916. In power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

  As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the right and left of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special-design lamps 401 and 402) that are controlled by the main control device 261 and perform variable display for teaching the result of the success / failure lottery. Is controlled by the sub-control device 262, and the start and end timings are synchronized with the fluctuation display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (switching display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402) (not involved in the result of the lottery determination) ) A sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) that performs variable display is provided.

  Further, since the sub lamp 417 constituting the sub display device 411 uses LEDs of the same product as the special figure lamps 401 and 402 constituting the special display devices 43a and 43b, the display by the sub lamp 417 is a special figure lamp. The display mode is similar to the display by 401 and 402. Therefore, which of the display modes by the special display devices 43a and 43b (special lamps 401 and 402) and the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) is the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special lamps 401 and 402). This makes it difficult to understand the stop display pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special lamps 401 and 402).

  Therefore, for example, while visually recognizing the stop display pattern (contents taught by) of the special display devices 43a and 43b, a player who wants to play an efficient game based on such information, and the special display device 43a, A player who does not grasp the stop display pattern (contents taught by) 43b or a player who does not visually recognize the special display devices 43a and 43b in order to enjoy the effects of the decorative symbol display device 42, etc. The difference in game results with the player (for example, the difference in game balls to be finally acquired) can be minimized. That is, the player who does not visually recognize the special display devices 43a and 43b loses relatively because the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b gains. It is possible to suppress such a situation. As a result, it is possible to grasp the stop display pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and to suppress the consciousness of losing unless the special display devices 43a and 43b are visually recognized. You can fully enjoy the production display.

  Further, in order to make it difficult to understand the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) controlled by the sub control device 262 performs variable display. Therefore, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the stop display of the main display device 49 is made more complicated (for example, the number of the special display lamps 401 and 402 is increased. Compared with a case where the number of stop display patterns of the lamps 401 and 402 is increased, the control burden on the main control device 261 can be reduced, and the main display device 49 can be simplified.

  In addition, the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) is provided on the left and right of the main display device 49 so as to sandwich the main display device 49 (special display devices 43a and 43b), and constitutes the special display devices 43a and 43b. The upper and lower rows of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 in the upper and lower rows are shifted by one lamp on the left and right sides, and the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are displaced from each other. Also, the sub lamp 417 is arranged. For this reason, the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub display device 411 are more complicated. Accordingly, the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b is instantaneously displayed (the stop display is displayed) from among the entire display modes configured by the display modes of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub display device 411. It can be more difficult to recognize and grasp the pattern of stop display.

  Further, the main control device 261 is configured to be able to output information related to the variation patterns and stop patterns of the special display devices 43a and 43b to the sub control device 262. The change pattern and stop pattern 411 are determined. Thereby, the display mode of the sub display device 411 can be matched with the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b. In the present embodiment, 14 LEDs composed of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 and the sub lamp 417 adjacent thereto are switched and displayed so as to light in a predetermined order. In addition, the range of patterns selected from the plurality of stop display patterns of the sub display device 411 is limited to some extent according to the result of the lottery determination (big hit type, etc.). It is like that. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display device 411 is more effectively combined with the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b to derive a more sensible display, or the stop mode of the sub display device 411 can be changed to the special display device. In combination with the stop modes of 43a and 43b, a predetermined meaningful display can be derived.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the stop display pattern (lighting of the sub lamp 417) of the sub display device 411 is different, although the stop display patterns of the special display devices 43a and 43b (lighting patterns of the special figure lamps 401 and 402) are different. When combined with a (pattern), a similar display mode (shape) is formed (see FIG. 45). In particular, in the present embodiment, although the lighting pattern of the special figure lamp 401 is taught to be “8RS” and “8RN”, respectively, it is combined with the lighting pattern of the sub lamp 417. In some cases, the display mode is the same, and the display mode in the decorative symbol display device 42 may be the same. In this case, it is not possible to grasp whether it is “8RS” or “8RN” simply by visually recognizing the decorative symbol display device 42. There is no choice but to grasp the stop pattern of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b (the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402). However, as described above, it is difficult to instantaneously determine the stop pattern of the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b even if the composite display device unit 40 is visually recognized. Therefore, “8RS” and It is difficult to determine which is “8RN”. As a result, the timing at which the already determined content is taught is postponed as much as possible, and various effects can be derived during that time, and the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is more difficult to understand. As a result, the effects of suppressing unfairness caused by knowledge and the like, and having the production of the decorative design display device 42 and the like more enjoyable are further exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a covering position that covers a part of the sub lamps 417 (four sub lamps 417 arranged in the vertical direction) of the sub display device 411 (the first sub display device 411a and the second sub display device 411b), A covering shutter 441 (a first shutter 442 and a second shutter 443) that can be displaced between an exposure position for exposing the part of the sub lamp 417 of the sub display device 411 is provided. Then, the visible range of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) is changed by the displacement of the covering shutter 441, and the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and the display mode of the sub display device 411 are configured. The overall display mode can be changed. Further, for example, FIG. 45A shows a mode in which the lighting lamps of the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides thereof are shifted to the right one by one from FIG. However, when the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) is displaced according to the difference in the light emission mode, a pattern is estimated from the sub lamp 417 that is not lit (the margin). Can be suppressed. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b and grasp the stop display.

  In addition, since the special display devices 43a, 43b and the sub display device 411 perform variable display by changing the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs, for example, the special display devices 43a, 43b, and Control is simplified as compared with the case where the sub display device 411 is configured with a liquid crystal display device, and the degree of freedom in design is improved as compared with the case where the sub display device 411 is configured with a segment display device. Further, although the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are arranged in a complicated manner as described above, they are arranged in a matrix as a whole, so that the design can be improved and the special figure can be improved. The effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary between the lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is further exhibited.

  In addition, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are mounted with a plurality of insertion holes 422 into which LEDs such as special figure lamps 401 and 402 mounted on the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 can be respectively inserted. The front surfaces of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are attached in contact with the rear surface side of the panel 421. For this reason, the substrates of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 can be positioned by the mounting panel 421. Therefore, the LEDs of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411, that is, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and the sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides thereof can be installed on the same plane without deviation. Compared with the case where it has shifted | deviated, it can be made difficult to distinguish the special figure lamp 401,402 and the sublamp 417. FIG.

  Further, the mounting panel 421 can make it difficult to understand the boundary between the substrate of the main display device 49 and the substrate of the sub display device 411. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the special figure lamps 401 and 402 from the sub lamp 417.

  In addition, the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are arranged in a matrix as a whole, and in the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display, the regular lighting mode of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is changed. For example, the appearance of the first and second variation displays is improved (becomes natural) compared to the case where light is turned only by the special figure lamps 401 and 402, for example, It is possible to make it difficult to understand the division between the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417, and when the fluctuation of the special display devices 43a and 43b is stopped, it is difficult to understand the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. It will be played more reliably.

  Further, when at least one of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is lit during the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the corresponding special figure lamps 401 and 402 (during the variable display) are displayed. At least one of these is configured to be lit. Thereby, it can be shown surely that the special display devices 43a and 43b are in a variable display.

  In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows.

  (A) In the above embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal hold display device 44, and The arrangement and number of LEDs constituting the sub display device 411 are not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamps 417, and the like are arranged in a matrix form, but may be arranged in a radial form as shown in FIG. Further, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamps 417, and the like are arranged at equal intervals, but may be arranged so that the intervals are partially different (there may be parts that are not close to each other). . Furthermore, the structure of the composite display device unit 40 (such as the attachment structure of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411) is not particularly limited, and the design can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, one main display device 49 (control board) and two sub display devices 411 (control board) are attached to the mounting panel 421. It may be constituted by a plurality of control boards, and they may be respectively attached to the attachment panel 421. Further, for example, in the above embodiment, the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are attached to the mounting panel 421, but the mounting panel 421 is omitted and the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are replaced with the base member 431. It is good also as attaching to. Note that the shape, material, hue, and the like of the mounting panel 421 are not particularly limited. For example, the mounting panel 421 may be made of an opaque resin. In addition, in the above embodiment, the composite display device unit 40 is attached to the game board 30, but may be configured to be attached to the inner frame 12 or the front frame set 14.

  Further, the display devices provided together in the composite display device unit 40 are not particularly limited. For example, the normal symbol display device 41 and the normal hold display device 44 are appropriately changed for each model, such as being provided in different members. Is possible. Furthermore, in the said embodiment, although the special display apparatus 43a, 43b and the sub display apparatus 411 are comprised by several LED, you may comprise by another display apparatus. For example, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and are configured as a first sub display device, a first special display device, and a second sub display device from the left, One shutter and a second shutter capable of covering the second sub display device may be provided. When this configuration is adopted, when the first shutter is in the covering position and the second shutter is in the exposure position, “1” is displayed on the first special display device, and the second sub display device is used. When “3” is displayed and when the first shutter is in the exposure position and the second shutter is in the covering position, “1” is displayed on the first sub-display device, and the first special display device is used. In the case where “3” is displayed, the same number “13” is displayed.

  In addition, for example, the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub display device 411 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, a rotating body (reel, cube, or the like) having identification information on the outer peripheral surface, or the like.

  (B) Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the 1st special display apparatus 43a and the 2nd special display apparatus 43b are applied as the object in which the sub lamp | ramp 417 of the sub display apparatus 411 is provided incidentally, in this structure Instead or in addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a sub lamp 417 is provided corresponding to the normal symbol display device 41 (ordinary symbol lamp 405), and the normal symbol display device 41 starts and stops changing display. In some cases, the main control device 261 outputs the information to the sub-control device 262 so that the sub-lamp 417 is turned on in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display device 41 (the general-purpose lamp 405). You may comprise. Further, a sub lamp 417 is provided corresponding to the normal hold display device 44 (normal hold lamp 406), and this is changed from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262 at the timing when the lighting mode of the normal hold display device 44 is changed. The sub lamp 417 may be configured to be lit and displayed in synchronization with the change of the lighting mode of the normal hold display device 44.

  When these configurations are adopted, it is difficult to determine whether or not the entrance support lottery is won based on the appearance of the normal symbol display device 41, and how many variable displays of the normal symbol display device 41 are held. It may be time-consuming to determine whether or not. Accordingly, the composite display device unit 40 (ordinary symbol display device 41) is visually recognized, the opening timing of the second start winning device 33b (wing member 37) is measured, and the game ball is efficiently entered into the second start winning device 33b. It is possible to make the act of making it difficult, and it is possible to suppress a situation in which there is a difference (with respect to the number of game balls to be finally acquired) with a player who does not perform such an action.

  When the configuration is adopted, the normal symbol display device 41 corresponds to the main display unit, and the normal hold display device 44 corresponds to the hold display unit. Further, a sub lamp 417 may be provided corresponding to the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) and the second hold display device 46b (second hold lamp 404). In this case, the first hold display device 46a and the second hold display device 46b correspond to hold display means.

  (C) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal hold. A decoration means that is controlled by the sub-control device 262 so as to be adjacent to either the display device 44 or the sub-display device 411, and a decorative display corresponding to (linked to) the variation display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed; In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 461 (LEDs of the same product as the special figure lamps 401 and 402) may be provided as decorative display means. That is, during the first variation display, variation display (switching display) is performed by the first special figure lamp 401 and the sub-lamps 417 on both the left and right sides thereof, and the decoration lamp 461 is lit in a predetermined order (for example, Lighting from the left to the right side, lighting from the left and right sides to the center side, or another mode such as high-speed fluctuation immediately before the decoration symbol fluctuation stops).

  In this case, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and even if the peripheral portions of the special display devices 43a and 43b are visually recognized, a flashy effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 42. In such a case, the display of the decorative lamp 461 corresponding to the effect display is easily distracted. Therefore, the above-described effects such as making it difficult to understand the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b are further exhibited.

  In place of or in addition to the decorative lamp 461, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the first hold display device 46a, the second hold display device 46b, the normal hold. Decorative means that is controlled by the sub-control device 262 so as to be adjacent to either the display device 44 or the sub-display device 411, and operates in association with (in conjunction with) the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42; It is good also as providing the movable accessory as a movable decoration means. For example, a movable accessory having a predetermined pattern (for example, a flower pattern or the like) on the front portion may be rotatably provided at the position where the decorative lamp 461 is provided. Further, for example, a substantially frame-shaped movable accessory disposed so as to surround the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 in front of the covering shutter 441 (the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443) of the above embodiment. The movable combination is composed of a pair of left and right U-shaped combinations, and each U-shaped combination appears and disappears a part of the sub display device 411 in the same manner as the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443. It is good also as comprised so that it may be slidable to right and left so that it may be made to oscillate and to rotate right and left.

  (D) In the above embodiment, when determining the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417, the sub lamp pattern determination table to be referred to is determined based on the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, and the sub Based on the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402, such as selecting one of the stop patterns of the plurality of sub lamps 417 by referring to the lamp pattern, Although the configuration is such that the range of the stop pattern is narrowed down, the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 is a specific stop pattern, the stop pattern of the sub lamp 417 may be determined as one pattern. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the stop pattern of the main display device 49 is different, but when combined with the stop pattern of the sub display device 411, the same mode (different position but same shape) is combined. It is also possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not a sub-lamp 417 is selected as a corresponding stop pattern when winning, and to select any other stop pattern when not winning. Good.

  Note that the variation patterns, stop patterns, and the like of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the sub display device 411 are not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate. The special display devices 43a and 43b, the normal symbol display device 41, the sub display device 411, and the like are configured by a plurality of LEDs. It may be configured by a device or a combination thereof.

  Furthermore, in the said embodiment, although the decorative design display apparatus 42 comprised with a liquid crystal display device is provided, you may employ | adopt another display apparatus. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 42 can be omitted. However, in parallel with the variable display of the main display device 49, a means for performing an effect (only sound or light emission from the lamp is possible) is provided separately from the composite display device unit 40, thereby improving performance and playability. Can be planned.

  (E) In the above embodiment, the stop pattern of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262. This information is output, but it is not necessary to output it. However, by outputting, it becomes possible to match the light emission mode of the sub display device 411 and the operation of the covering shutter 441 with the light emission mode of the special display devices 43a and 43b. The display modes of the devices 43a and 43b can be made more difficult to understand, or the special display devices 43a and 43b and the sub display device 411 can make a meaningful display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the variation information of the special display devices 43a and 43b is configured to be included in the variation pattern command. It may be configured to be included.

  (F) In the above embodiment, a decorative panel is provided as a starting covering means that covers at least the front of the second starting prize-winning device 33b, and a game ball that moves in the gaming area passes through the covering area covered by the decorative panel. Passing detection means that can detect a game ball that has entered the entrance device, or a passage detection means that can detect a game ball that has passed through the gate while providing a possible gate or a entrance device that can enter the ball When the passage detection means or the entrance detection means is detected, a pseudo hold icon that imitates the hold icon is displayed on the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 42 and changes. You may comprise so that the production | presentation of whether the display was hold | maintained may be derived | led-out.

  In the case of adopting such a configuration, as a sub display means, adjacent to the first hold display device 46a (first hold lamp 403) or the second hold display device 45b (second hold lamp 404) as the hold display means. The sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) may be provided, and when the pseudo-hold icon is derived in the decorative symbol display device 42, the lighting mode of the corresponding sub lamp 417 may be changed. In this case, it is possible to suppress a situation where it is determined at a glance that the variable display is not held if the composite display device unit 40 is visually recognized.

  The decorative panel may be configured to cover the front of the first start winning device 33a, or when the first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b are arranged relatively close to each other. The first start winning device 33a and the second start winning device 33b may be configured to cover both. In this example, the gate or the winning device constitutes a pseudo winning detection means, and the pseudo hold icon corresponds to the pseudo winning mode.

  In addition, with respect to the pseudo hold icon, in order to avoid a decrease in interest, it is assumed that the pseudo winning detection means has been detected in a state where no change display of the special display devices 42a and 43b is held. It is desirable to configure so that the Further, in order to suppress the occurrence of trouble caused by misinterpreting the pseudo hold icon as the hold icon to the end, it is desirable that the pseudo hold icon and the real hold icon are configured to have different modes. Further, even when a hold icon is displayed, as a previous step, a precursor hold icon having the same form as the pseudo hold icon is first displayed, and then the precursor hold icon changes to a hold icon. It is good also as comprising. In this case, even if the pseudo hold icon is displayed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is immediately determined that the icon is not a hold icon.

  (G) In the embodiment described above, a decoration panel as a support covering means that covers at least the front of the through gate 34 is provided, and a gate through which a game ball moving in the game area can pass in the covering area covered by the decoration panel. And at least a normal symbol display of the normal symbol display device 41 (ordinary lamp 405) and the normal hold device 44 (normal hold lamp 406). Adjacent to the device 41, pseudo-variable display means may be provided in which switching display is performed (for production or decoration) when the passage detection means is detected. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is stopped and to display the stop display pattern of the normal symbol display device 41, and as a result, by visually recognizing the composite display device unit 40, The act of trying to open the 2 start winning device 33b (blade member 37) can be made more difficult.

  The pseudo-variable display means is electrically connected to the sub-control device 262, and the display unit (in the above example, a plurality of LEDs) of the normal symbol display device 41 (and the normal hold display device 44) installed correspondingly. ), And when the passage detection means is detected, the sub-control device 262 causes the pseudo-variable display means to be turned on (corresponding to the normal symbol display device 41). The variation pattern and the stop pattern are determined.

  (H) In the above embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are provided as the covering shutter 441. However, the number and arrangement of the covering shutter 441 are not particularly limited, and the arrangement of the sub lamps 417 is not limited. It can be appropriately changed for each model according to the above. However, by providing the covering shutter 441 such as a pair of left and right or a pair of upper and lower, the covering sub lamp 417 is changed without changing the area of the exposed sub display device 411 (the portion of the exposed sub display device 411 is also changed). Is possible. Further, the covering shutter 441 may be configured to cover all the sub lamps 417 at a time. In the above embodiment, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are configured to be maintained at the exposure position during the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b. The shutter 441 may be configured to operate. Furthermore, the configuration of the covering shutter 441 is not particularly limited, and for example, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 may be rotationally displaced, or may be displaced by a motor. A light guide plate or a half mirror may be installed as a covering shutter (covering means). In addition, light emitting means may be provided on the front surface of the covering shutter 441. For example, the same LED as the sub lamp 417 is provided on the front surface of the covering shutter 441 in the arrangement corresponding to the sub lamp 417 and the lighting is controlled even when the covering shutter 441 is at the exposure position (similar to the sub lamp 417). When utilizing, it may be configured as a sub display means).

  The covering shutter 441 (covering means) can be omitted. Even when the covering shutter 441 is omitted, by appropriately changing the lighting mode of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417), for example, the first result in the lottery determination (for example, winning “16RS”) The first mode of the first special display unit 43a or the second special display unit 43b (the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402) of the main display unit 49 and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 are combined. The first combined aspect of the first special figure lamp 401 or the second special figure lamp 402 teaching the second result (for example, winning “8RS”), and the sub lamp 417. You may comprise so that the 2nd compound aspect combined with the lighting aspect can be made into the same display aspect (The position displayed is different, but the shape is the same). Also in this case, there is an effect that it is difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49.

  (I) In the above-described embodiment, when one second has elapsed after the result of the lottery determination is displayed on the special display devices 43a and 43b, even if the next variation display is not performed (the transition to the big hit state or the standby state) It is configured to switch to the display pattern corresponding to the standby state after the fluctuation interval period has elapsed (after one second in the above example), but until the next fluctuation display is started. Alternatively, the display pattern may be configured to be maintained in the stop display.

  In the composite display device unit 40, a game mode teaching device for teaching the game mode may be provided. When the configuration is adopted, the game mode teaching device may be configured such that display modes indicating the same mode are sequentially switched and displayed so that the determination of the game mode is relatively difficult.

  (J) In the above embodiment, at least one of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 may be configured to be displaceable. For example, with respect to the various lamps of the main display device 49, the sub lamps 417 of the sub display device 411 are shifted by one line in the vertical direction, or change between a position at which a predetermined sub lamp 417 is visible and a position at which it cannot be viewed. You may comprise so that it may be comprised. In this case, the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the main display device 49 and the display mode of the sub display device 411 can be changed completely, and the display mode of the main display device 49 is recognized to grasp the fixed display. Can be more difficult to do.

  (K) In the above embodiment, the main display device 49 is stopped by providing the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) adjacent to the main display device 49 (first special figure lamp 401, second special figure lamp 402). Although it is configured to make it difficult to grasp the pattern, it may be configured to make it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 by another method. Hereinafter, an exemplary embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  (K-1) The composite display type knit 40 shown in FIG. 49 basically has the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment (see FIG. 41 and the like), but includes a mounting panel 421 and a covering shutter 441 (first shutter). 442 and the second shutter 443), a relatively large gap is formed between the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 with respect to the back surfaces (rear surfaces) of the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443. An irradiation lamp 465 (LED or the like) as an irradiation unit capable of irradiating light is attached. In this example, the light from the irradiation lamp 465 strikes the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417. In addition, the light color of the irradiation lamp 465 of the present embodiment is the same as the light color of the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 (the irradiation lamp 465 includes the special lamps 401 and 402, And the same lamp (LED) as the sub lamp 417 or the like is used).

  The main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 are mounted together on the rear surface side of the mounting panel 421, and the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is a peripheral portion of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417. The front surface of the mounting panel 421 is also irradiated. In the present embodiment, the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is plated (not shown), so that the light reflectance on the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is substantially transparent (the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are transparent). Higher) than the surface.

  Further, a funnel shape is formed so that the peripheral portion of the insertion hole 422 into which the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 are individually inserted in the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is inclined rearward toward the insertion hole 422 side. Is formed.

  Further, the illumination lamp 465 is controlled to be turned on by the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is based on a variation pattern command that is information on the stop pattern of the special display devices 43a and 43b transmitted from the main control device 261. The lighting mode of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 are determined. Further, the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to change its mode at least before and after the end of the variable display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. In the present embodiment, the irradiation lamp 465 is turned off during the fluctuation display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, and after the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined lighting mode, until the interval period elapses. And the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are blinking slowly during the fluctuation display, and until the interval period elapses after the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped and displayed in a predetermined lighting mode. There is a pattern of flashing quickly.

  As described above, in this example, the special lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the front surface of the mounting panel 421 that is the periphery thereof are irradiated with the light of the irradiation lamp 465. Of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, both of which are lit to teach the result of the lottery determination and the range including the boundary with the peripheral part are irradiated with the light of the irradiation lamp 465. Whether the corresponding part is currently lit or extinguished by making the contrast between them as vague (blurred) as much as possible, or by irradiating the special lamps 401 and 402 with the light of the irradiation lamp 465 Can be difficult to understand. As a result, an effect of making it difficult to understand the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (special map lamps 401 and 402) (making judgment in an instant difficult) is achieved.

  Furthermore, it is difficult to recognize where the boundary between the special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417 is caused by irradiating light between the special figure lamps 401, 402 and the sub lamp 417. It becomes difficult to recognize the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402. As a result, the effect of suppressing the consciousness of grasping the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and losing unless the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are visually recognized will be further exhibited. .

  Further, in this embodiment, the front surface of the mounting panel 421 that is the peripheral portion of the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is plated to increase the light reflectance. For this reason, by irradiating the light of the irradiation lamp 465, the effect of making the boundary between the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 and their peripheral parts as vague as possible is further exhibited. It becomes.

  Furthermore, the peripheral part of the insertion hole 422 for inserting the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub-lamp 417 is configured to be inclined rearward toward the insertion hole 422 in the front surface of the mounting panel 421. Yes. As a result, the peripheral portions of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 in the front surface of the mounting panel 421 are arranged on the side of the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 and on the front side (diagonally forward). It will have the inclined surface which inclines to the irradiation lamp 465 side. With such an inclined surface, the light from the oblique front irradiated by the irradiation lamp 465 can be efficiently reflected forward (player side).

  In addition, the peripheral portions (at the front end) of the special lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 (as viewed from the front player side) are attached to the main display device 49 and the sub display device 411 instead of the board itself. Since it is constituted by the panel 421, the processing of the peripheral portions of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 (such as increasing the reflectivity or forming a concave shape as described above) is relatively free and It can be done easily.

  Further, the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to change its mode before and after the end (stop display) timing of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b (special figure lamps 401 and 402). In particular, after the stop display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, the form of the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to be relatively flashy than before the stop display. As a result, the above-described effects such as making it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (special lamps 401 and 402) are further exhibited.

  Since the irradiation lamp 465 is controlled by the sub-control device 262, the display mode of the sub-lamp 417 is reduced while reducing the control burden on the main control device 261 as compared with the case where the main control device 261 controls the irradiation lamp 465. And the irradiation state of the irradiation lamp 465 can be reliably matched. Further, the sub control device 262 determines the lighting mode of the sub display device 411 (sub lamp 417) and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 261. For this reason, the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 and the irradiation mode of the irradiation lamp 465 can be matched with the fluctuation display and stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402.

  The irradiation lamp 465 is attached to the back side of the covering shutter 441 and is configured to be displaced together with the covering shutter 441. Thereby, the position shift between the position of the covering shutter 441 and the irradiation mode (the position of the irradiated light) by the irradiation lamp 465 can be prevented. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the same display mode of the composite display constituted by the lighting mode of the first special figure lamp 401 and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 is the same. When it is possible to derive at different display positions, the first shutter 442 and the second shutter 443 are used to make it difficult to understand that the display positions are different. In the case of adopting a configuration that covers an area that is not used, eight first special figure lamps 401 and six sub lamps 417 arranged on the left and right sides of the first special figure lamp 401 among the sub lamps 417. Among the 14 LED groups configured, in the state of FIG. 45 (a), two LEDs on the left (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 1) and four LEDs on the right (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 2) are used. Against In the state of FIG. 45 (b), the light from the shooting lamp 465 is irradiated. On the other hand, the left four (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 2) and the right two (vertical × horizontal; 2 × 1). It is possible to avoid the fact that the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is different such that the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is irradiated to the LED. Therefore, it is easily estimated that the covering shutter 441 is displaced according to the light state of the irradiation lamp 465, and the situation where the stop pattern of the main display device 49 (special figure lamps 401 and 402) is easily recognized is suppressed. can do. Further, since the irradiation lamp 465 itself is directly visually recognized, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the designability is deteriorated.

  (K-2) In the above example (k-1), the peripheral portion of each insertion hole 432 is configured to incline backward toward the insertion hole 432 side of the front surface of the mounting panel 421. The configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, a recess or protrusion similar to the front view shape of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 is formed on the front surface of the mounting panel 421, and the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is applied thereto. Good. Furthermore, for example, the front surface of the mounting panel 421 may be randomly formed, or may be formed flat as in the above embodiment.

  Furthermore, in the above example (k-1), the irradiation lamp 465, the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the like may be configured by a lamp capable of deriving a plurality of emission colors such as a three-color LED. Good. In that case, at the timing of the stop display of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the irradiation lamp 465 has the same color as the emission color of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 toward the target special figure lamps 401 and 402. You may comprise so that light may be irradiated.

  Moreover, in the said example (k-1), although the irradiation lamp 465 is attached to the back surface of the covering shutter 441, it is not specifically limited to this structure, For example, special figure lamp 401, 402, and It may be attached to the attachment panel 421 so as not to be displaced relative to the sub lamp 417, or an irradiation stand provided with an irradiation lamp 465 may be provided adjacent to the composite display device unit 40. It is good also as providing so that it can be displaced with respect to (it can be tilted or rotated by the driving force of a predetermined drive means). Furthermore, the irradiation lamp 465 may be provided at a position where it can be visually recognized by the player, may be provided at a position where it cannot be visually recognized, or may be configured to be visible and hidden depending on the position of the covering shutter 441. .

  In addition, the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to irradiate the main display device 49 with light reflected by a reflecting means such as a mirror without irradiating light directly from the light source toward the main display device 49 side. It is also possible to do. Moreover, in the said example (k-1), although the front surface of the attachment panel 421 which is a peripheral part of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sublamp 417 is plated, it is not limited to especially this structure. Absent. However, from the viewpoint of reducing the contrast between the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the sub lamp 417 and their peripheral parts by irradiating light from the irradiation lamp 465, at least the front surface of the mounting panel 421 is It is desirable to be made of a material with high reflectivity. The material having a high reflectance may be a material having a substantially constant reflection angle such as a mirror, or may have a different reflection angle such as a white plate.

  47 and 48, the light from the decorative lamp 461 is not only forward, but also from the side, that is, the first special figure lamp 401, the second special figure lamp 402, the universal figure lamp 405, the first holding lamp 403, the first holding lamp 403, and the like. The 2 hold lamp 404, the normal hold lamp 406, the sub lamp 417, and the periphery thereof may be irradiated. In this case, the effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary portion between these various lamps and the peripheral portion thereof is further exhibited. Moreover, when the said structure is employ | adopted, the decoration lamp 461 comprises an irradiation means.

  Further, although not particularly mentioned in the above-described aspect example (k-1), it may be that “the front end portion of the light emitting means and the front surface of the mounting panel are substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction”. . Further, for example, “the front end portion of the light emitting means may be configured in a planar shape”. When these structures are adopted, the effect of suppressing the difference in appearance between the light emitting means and the peripheral portion thereof is further exhibited.

  In addition, in the above-described aspect example (k-1), the light of the irradiation lamp 465 is configured to be able to irradiate the special figure lamps 401 and 402, the sub lamp 417, and the peripheral portion thereof. However, it is only necessary to be configured to be able to irradiate the front side of the special display devices 43a and 43b provided with at least the special figure lamps 401 and 402. For example, when the sub lamp 417 is provided side by side with the holding lamps 403 and 404 and the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 is changed in accordance with the change in the lighting mode of the holding lamps 403 and 404, the irradiation lamps of the holding lamps 403 and 404 are irradiated. It may be configured to irradiate 465 light, or in a configuration in which the lighting mode of the sub lamp 417 is also changed in accordance with the change in lighting mode of the general lamp 405, the irradiation lamp is applied to the general lamp 405. You may comprise so that 465 light may be irradiated.

  Note that the sub display device 411 may be omitted if the configuration is such that it is difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 by a method different from the sub display device 411.

  (L) Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 50, a rotating mirror plate 471 configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction as a rotation axis is provided in front of the main display device 49, and left and right of the main display device 49 are arranged. On both sides, a pair of left and right fixed mirror plates 472 and 473 extending obliquely forward from the main display device 49 side to the side may be provided.

  Then, as shown by the solid line in FIG. 50, when the rotating mirror plate 471 rotates to the left front, the main display device 49 (special drawing lamps 401 and 402) has the rotating mirror plate 471 and The light is reflected by the left fixed mirror plate 472 and is visually recognized from the front. On the other hand, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 50, when the rotating mirror plate 471 rotates to the right front, the main display device 49 includes the rotating mirror plate 471 and the right fixed mirror plate 473. It will be reflected from and will be visible from the front. In this case, the display position of the main display device 49 can be moved (switched) to another position in an instant, and the effect of making it difficult to grasp the stop pattern of the main display device 49 is achieved.

  Further, the composite display unit 40 shown in FIG. 50 is provided with a fixed-side light emitting unit 475 (LED or the like) as a sub-display unit, a decoration unit, or an irradiation unit adjacent to the fixed mirror plates 472 and 473. In the rotating mirror plate 471 (a position that does not overlap with the reflection mode of the main display device 49), a rotating side light emitting section 476 (LED or the like) as a sub display means, a decoration means, or an irradiation means is provided. The light emitted from the rotation-side light emitting unit 476 is reflected by the fixed mirror plates 472 and 473 and is emitted forward together with the lights of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 described above. Further, the light of the fixed side light emitting unit 475 (the fixed side light emitting unit 475 on the side on which the rotating mirror plate 471 rotates) emits light together with the special figure lamps 401 and 402 and the light of the rotating side light emitting unit 476. , It comes to be irradiated forward.

  In addition, the rotating mirror plate 471 is configured to be rotationally displaced immediately before the special figure lamps 401 and 402 are stopped. Further, the rotation-side light emitting unit 476 is configured such that the lighting mode changes in accordance with the change of the lighting mode of the special figure lamps 401 and 402, like the sub lamp 417 of the above embodiment. As a result, the operational effect of making it difficult to recognize the stop pattern of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 is more reliably achieved.

  The rotating mirror plate 471 is configured to stop even at a directly-facing position parallel to the front surface (mounting panel 421) of the main display device 49, and the special-purpose lamps 401 and 402 of the rotating mirror plate 471. The opposing parts may be configured by a beam splitter. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of patterns in which the turning mirror plate 471 is set to the directly facing position and the lighting state of the special figure lamps 401 and 402 is viewed through the turning mirror plate 471.

  (M) In the above embodiment, the variable display based on the game ball entering the second start winning device 33b has priority over the variable display based on the game ball entering the first start winning device 33a. However, regardless of which of the first start prize-winning device 33a and the second start prize-winning device 33b is a variation display based on the pitch, the order is put on hold. You may comprise so that a fluctuation display may be digested. Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variable display based on the winning ball (only by visually recognizing the hold icon). However, it may be configured so that it can be understood which of the variable displays corresponds.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to display the same number of hold icons as the upper limit of the variable display hold number of the special display devices 43a and 43b. For example, the special display device 43a , 43b may be configured to display only up to four hold icons at maximum in the decorative symbol display device 42 even when five or more variable displays are held in total. In addition, when it is possible to display the same number of hold icons as the upper limit of the variable display hold number (eight in the above example), the display space (hold display area) for the hold icon is reduced first. You may comprise so that the four hold icons digested later may be displayed smaller than the four hold icons performed. Moreover, you may comprise about the aspect of the four pending | holding icons digested later so that it may become a simplified aspect of the grade which can grasp | ascertain the number of pending | holding.

  (N) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the open / close patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b of various jackpot types are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning / losing lottery varies, but the winning probability does not vary (is constant), and the period of high pitched state (fluctuated) that is granted after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared.

  In the above embodiment, the number and arrangement of the start winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, and the through gates 34 are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the success / failure lottery performed when the game ball enters the first start winning device 33a and the success / failure lottery performed when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33b are separately performed. The table is referred to and the distribution of the jackpot type is changed, but it may be the same.

  (O) In the above-described embodiment, the main control device 261 performs the normal process (see FIG. 10) after the main process (see FIG. 9), but is particularly limited to such a structure. is not. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating of the counter value performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal process in the above embodiment is performed. For example, in timer interrupt processing performed every 2 msec, The process performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal process in the embodiment and the process of step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt process in the embodiment may be performed. In this case, as the processing of step S401, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, A configuration in which a flag indicating the occurrence of occurrence of the error is turned on is given. Further, the processing in step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

  (P) In the above-described embodiment, the information on whether or not a big hit state is generated is overwritten on the success / failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success / failure random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a big hit state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of each special variable holding area and each holding area. Separately from the area, an execution area of the special variable holding area and a storage area corresponding to each holding area may be provided, and information on whether or not a big hit state occurs in the storage area may be stored. In addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, a storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3; Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. In the above embodiment, at the start of the special symbol variation display, it is confirmed again whether or not the value of the success / failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the winning, and the process according to the confirmation process is performed. You may comprise.

  (Q) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a different type from the above-mentioned embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed between a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows entry into the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits entry into the specific area ( Variable entry means comprising wing members), specific entry means and non-specific entry means capable of entering a game ball entering a specific area, and detection of a game ball entering the specific entry means Specific entry detection means (condition establishment detection means) to be detected, special start means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering game balls moving in the game area, and game balls entering the special start means are detected. A special start detection means for controlling and a main control means for performing opening / closing control of the variable pitching means, and when a game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is designated as the specific pitching means and the non-specific pitching means. Regardless of which ball is entered, a predetermined number of game values (game balls) are given to the player. The main control means, based on the detection of the special start detection means, is a small hit state in which the variable pitching means is opened once or a plurality of times for the first time, or the variable pitching means is set to the first time. Whether or not to generate a jackpot state where a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the open state for a longer second time or a predetermined number of game balls enter the open variable winning means, and this is repeated a specified number of times. If you win a lottery in the winning lottery, you will generate a small win status, if you win a big hit in the lottery lottery, and if there is a detection of specific entry detection means You may apply to the gaming machine which generates a big hit state. In addition to pachinko machines, various ball games, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving game machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines May be.

[Appendix]
The technical idea that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

  P. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  In addition, there is provided a main control display means such as a main display means for directly teaching the determined matter such as the result of the lottery, and an effect display means that may only suggest the determined matter. Many are provided (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480). In the effect display means, there may be a case in which the teaching of the confirmed matter is postponed only as a rough suggestion of the confirmed matter. Thereby, the opportunity of production can be increased, an inflection etc. can be attached by a game, and improvement of production performance, game performance, etc. can be aimed at.

  By the way, there is a case where the game can be advantageously advanced by knowing the confirmed matters such as the result of the lottery first. In this case, the display mode of the main control display means is grasped, and the main control display means A relatively large difference in game results between a player who is playing a game while visually recognizing the game and a player who is not visually recognizing the main control display means by enjoying the effect on the effect display means (for example, There is a concern that there will be a difference in the game value that will ultimately be acquired.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is that a player who visually recognizes and plays the main control display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in gaming results between the two.

Means P-1. A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main control display means directly controlled by the main control means;
(Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and effect display related to the display of the main control display means is performed)
A sub-control display means that is controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means and whose display is switched in synchronization with the main control display means;
The sub-control display means is disposed adjacent to the main control display means, and has a display section similar to the display section of the main control display means.

  According to the means P-1, the sub-control display means arranged adjacent to the main control display means performs a display synchronized with the display of the main control display means, and the sub-control display means displays the same display as the main control display means. Department. For this reason, it becomes difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main control display unit and the sub control display unit is the display mode of the main control display unit, and consequently, the display pattern indicated by the main control display unit, It is possible for the control display means to make it difficult to understand the content taught (such as an associated event) by the display (make it difficult to make an instant determination). Therefore, for example, a player who wants to play an efficient game based on such information while visually recognizing the main control display means, a player who does not grasp the display pattern of the main control display means, or an effect display means Differences in game results with players who do not visually recognize the main control display means because they want to enjoy another presentation performed in parallel with the final display such as ) Can be made as small as possible. That is, a situation where a player who does not visually recognize the main control display means loses as much as the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the main control display means gains. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the display pattern of the main control display means and suppress the consciousness of losing unless the main control display means is visually recognized. We can have you fully enjoy another indication to be performed.

  Further, in order to make the display of the main control display means difficult to understand, pseudo display is performed by the sub control display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the display of the main control display means, the control burden on the main control means is reduced or the main control display means is simplified compared to the case where the main control display means is more complicated. Can be planned.

  Note that the special game state includes not only a hit state in a pachinko machine, but also a state in which a winning probability in a predetermined lottery such as a winning lottery is increased, or an open state in which a game ball moving in a game area can enter. This includes the state in which the starting and entering means for changing the state to the closed state where the entry is impossible is made open.

  The main control display means is embodied as “main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means and performs final display for teaching the result of the lottery”, and the sub-control display means is “by the sub-control means”. A configuration embodied in “a sub-display unit that is controlled directly or indirectly and performs pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display unit” will be described below in unit A-1 and later. Further, the main control display means is embodied as “a hold display means that directly controls the main control means and teaches the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means”. A configuration that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-display unit that can perform switching display when the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored in the hold storage unit is described later. Means B-1 is described below.

  Means P-2. Among the display units of the main control display unit and the display unit of the sub control display unit, at least a part of one is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the other. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means P-2, the display mode of the main control display unit and the display mode of the sub control display unit are more complicated. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to instantly recognize the display mode of the main control display unit from the entire display mode configured by the display mode of the main control display unit and the display mode of the sub control display unit.

Means P-3. The main control means is configured to be able to output information related to the display of the main control display means to the sub-control means,
The gaming machine according to means P-1 or P-2, wherein the sub-control means determines display of the sub-control display means based on information relating to display of the main control display means.

  According to the means P-3, the display mode of the sub control display means can be matched with the display mode of the main control display means. Accordingly, the display mode of the sub-control display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the main control display unit to derive a more reminiscent display, or the stop mode of the sub-control display unit is changed to that of the main control display unit. In combination with the stop mode, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived. Accordingly, the effect of making the display pattern of the main control display means more difficult to understand is further exhibited.

  Means P-4. It is provided with covering means that can be displaced between a covering position that covers a part of the display part of the sub control display means and an exposure position that exposes the part of the display part of the sub control display means. A gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-3.

  According to the means P-4, the visible range of the sub-control display means is changed by the displacement of the covering means, and is constituted by the display mode of the main control display means and the display mode of the sub-control display means. The entire display mode can be changed. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main control display means.

  The display part of the main control display means is configured not to be covered with the covering means. Further, “a covering driving unit that drives the covering unit is provided, and the covering driving unit is driven and controlled by the sub-control unit”. In this case, the display mode of the sub-control display means and the driving state of the covering drive means are reliably matched with each other while reducing the control burden on the main control means as compared with the case where the main control means executes control of the covering drive means. Can do.

Means P-5. The main control display means and the sub control display means are:
When the covering means is in the exposed position, a display mode using a display unit installed in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means in the covering position among the sub control display means; The same display mode configured with the display mode of the main control display means,
The means P-4 is configured to be able to be derived without using the display portion covered by the covering means among the sub-control display means when the covering means is in the covering position. The gaming machine described in 1.

Means P-6. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display portion of the sub-control display means, and a first portion capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub-control display means different from the first covering means. 2 covering means,
The main control display means and the sub control display means are:
A display mode of the sub-control display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is in the coating position and the second coating unit is in the exposed position, and a display mode of the main control display unit The same display mode that is configured,
A display mode of the sub-control display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is in the exposed position and the second coating unit is in the coating position, and a display mode of the main control display unit The gaming machine according to means A-4 or P-5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be derivable.

  As specific examples of means P-5 and means P-6, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and from the left as first sub-control display means, main control display means, and second sub-control display means A first covering means capable of covering the first sub control display means and a second covering means capable of covering the second sub control display means are provided. When the first covering means is in the covering position and the second covering means is in the exposed position, “1” is displayed on the main control display means and “3” is displayed on the second sub-control display means. When the first covering means is in the exposed position and the second covering means is in the covering position, “1” is displayed on the first control sub-display means and “3” is displayed on the main control display means. In both cases, the same number “13” is displayed. In this way, the display (teaching content) of the main control display means is different, but when combined with the display of the sub control display means, the display of the main control display means can be understood by enabling the appearance of the same appearance as a whole. The above-mentioned effect of making it difficult will be achieved more reliably. Incidentally, by adopting the configuration of the means P-3, even if the position of the covering means is different, the phenomenon that the same display mode is derived as the whole display part of the main control display means and the sub control display means is a coincidence. Instead, it is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (by pinpointing) or deriving (by limiting the corresponding patterns to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the means P-6 is adopted, the main control display visually recognized by the player by the first covering means and the second covering means operating in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction). The area obtained by adding the area of the display section of the means and the area of the display section of the sub-control display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main control display means and the sub control display means must be changed due to the difference in area.

  Note that the number of covering means having the relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means P-6 is not particularly limited. It is good also as providing. Further, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is not limited to one constituted by a single plate-like body. For example, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is constituted by a plurality of plate-like bodies, and each is independent by a driving means. Thus, it may be configured to be operable.

  Means P-7. The main control display means and the sub control display means each include a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted, and the display section of the main control display means and the display section of the sub control display means include: The gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-6, comprising the plurality of light emitting means.

  According to the means P-7, simplification of control and the like are achieved as compared with the case where the main control display means and the sub control display means are constituted by the liquid crystal display device, and compared with the case where the segment display device is constituted. Design freedom is improved. It should be noted that “the light emission means of the main control display means and the light emission means of the sub control display means are arranged in a matrix as a whole”. In this case, the design is improved, and the effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary between the main control display means and the sub control display means is further exhibited.

Means P-8. A mounting panel having insertion holes into which the light emitting means of the main control display means and the sub control display means can be individually inserted on the display side of the main control display means and the sub control display means. Is provided,
The main control display means and the sub control display means are characterized in that the light emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. 8. The gaming machine according to 7.

  According to the means P-8, the light emitting substrates of the main control display means and the sub control display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Accordingly, the light emission means of the main control display means and the sub control display means can be installed on the same plane without deviation. For example, the light emission means of the main control display means and the sub control display can be compared with the case where they are displaced. This makes it difficult to distinguish the light emitting means from the light emitting means.

  Further, the mounting panel can hide the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main control display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub control display means and the surface of the light emitting substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the light emitting means of the main control display means and the light emitting means of the sub control display means, and it is possible to improve the design and convenience.

Means P-9. The plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light emitting means of the sub control display means are arranged in a matrix with the light emitting means of the main control display means so as to follow the matrix of the light emitting means of the main control display means,
The fixed display is a variable display by changing the position or combination of the light emitting means to be turned on among the plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means, and after a predetermined time, the main control A plurality of the light emitting means of the display means are configured to be lit in a combination associated with the lottery result,
During the variable display of the main control display means, the plurality of light emission means of the main control display means and the sub control display means are arranged in the entire arrangement by the plurality of light emission means of the main control display means and the sub control display means. The gaming machine according to means P-7 or P-8, characterized in that lighting and extinguishing are repeated so as to be regular.

  For example, when the plurality of light emitting means of the main control display means arranged in a matrix are regularly turned on in sequence, the arrangement of the light emitting means of the main control display means is interrupted, but instead, the sub control display means If the light emitting means are arranged side by side, the light emitting means of the sub control display means is turned on, so that a regular lighting mode can be applied to the entire main control display means and sub control display means. . Therefore, the appearance of the fluctuation display of the main control display means is improved (natural), and the separation between the light emission means of the main control display means and the light emission means of the sub control display means can be made difficult to understand. When the change of the display means is stopped, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the display of the main control display means can be achieved more reliably.

  Means P-10. In a state where at least one of the light emission means of the main control display means and the sub control display means is lit during the variable display of the main control display means, at least one of the light emission means of the main control display means. One of the gaming machines according to means P-9, wherein one of them is turned on.

  According to the means P-10, it can be surely shown that the main control display means is in a variable display.

Means P-11. Directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, provided with an effect display means for effect display related to the display of the main control display means,
Adjacent to at least one of the main control display means and the sub control display means, is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub control means, and corresponds (linked) to the effect display of the effect display means. The gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-10, comprising a decoration display means for performing decoration display.

  According to the means P-11, it becomes more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main control display means, and even if the peripheral part of the main control display means is visually recognized, the effect display means performs a flashy effect display. In such a case, the decoration display corresponding to the effect display is easily distracted. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the display of the main control display means is further exhibited. The decoration display means may have the same display section as the display sections of the main control display means and the sub control display means.

  Means P-12. The gaming machine according to any one of means P-1 to P-11, wherein at least one of the main control display means and the sub control display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means P-12, the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the main control display unit and the display mode of the sub control display unit can be completely changed, and the display mode of the main control display unit is recognized. Can make things more difficult.

  A. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, there are many cases where an effect display means is provided that follows the change display performed by the main display means and performs change display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, refer to JP 2006-271480 A). In the effect display means, even when the result of the lottery is taught in the main display means, the result of the lottery result may be postponed only as a rough suggestion of the result of the lottery. Thereby, the opportunity of production can be increased, an inflection etc. can be attached by a game, and improvement of production performance, game performance, etc. can be aimed at.

  By the way, there is a case where the game can be advantageously advanced by knowing the result of the lottery first, in this case, the game in which the game is performed while grasping the display mode of the main display means and visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired) between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, by enjoying the effect on the effect display means There is a concern that will be attached.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is between a player who visually recognizes the main display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in game results.

Means A-1. A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
Sub-display means that is controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means, and that performs pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the final display of the main display means,
The sub display means is arranged adjacent to the main display means, and has a display section similar to a display section for performing the final display of the main display means.

  According to the means A-1, pseudo display is performed in the sub display means arranged adjacent to the main display means in synchronization with the fixed display of the main display means (not related to the result of the lottery determination), and the sub display means is the main display means. Since the display unit similar to the display unit is provided, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the fixed display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and consequently, it is difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Can be difficult). Therefore, for example, while confirming the confirmation display (contents taught by) of the main display means, the player who wants to play an efficient game based on such information and the confirmation display of the main display means are grasped. Difference in game results (for example, the difference in game value to be finally acquired) with a player who does not visually recognize the main display means because he / she wants to enjoy the effects such as the effect display means It can be made as small as possible. In other words, the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the main display means gains relatively, and relatively suppresses the situation where the player who does not visually recognize the main display means loses. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the confirmation display pattern of the main display means and suppress the consciousness of losing if the main display means is not visually recognized, and fully enjoy the effect display of the effect display means. I can have you.

  Further, in order to make it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means, pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the confirmation display on the main display means, the control burden on the main control means can be reduced or the main display means can be simplified compared to the case where the confirmation display on the main display means is more complicated. It can be planned.

  Means A-2. Of the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit, at least a part of one of the display units is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the other. Gaming machine.

  According to the means A-2, the display mode of the main display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit are more complicated. Therefore, the display mode of the main display unit is instantly recognized (while the fixed display is displayed) from the entire display mode constituted by the display mode of the main display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit. It is possible to make it harder to grasp the fixed display.

Means A-3. The main control means is configured to be able to output information on the final display of the main display means to the sub-control means,
The gaming machine according to means A-1 or A-2, wherein the sub-control means determines the pseudo display of the sub-display means based on information related to the final display of the main display means.

  According to the means A-3, the display mode of the sub display means can be matched with the display mode of the main display means. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the main display unit to derive a more sensible display, or the stop mode of the sub display unit is combined with the stop mode of the main display unit. In addition, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived. Therefore, the operational effect of making the confirmation display pattern of the main display means more difficult to understand is further exhibited.

  Means A-4. It is characterized by comprising covering means that can be displaced between a covering position that covers a part of the display part of the sub display means and an exposed position that exposes the part of the display part of the sub display means. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-3.

  According to the means A-4, the entire display composed of the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub display means is changed by changing the visible range of the sub display means due to the displacement of the covering means. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it is more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display means and grasp the fixed display.

  The display unit of the main display unit is configured not to be covered with the covering unit. Further, “a covering driving unit that drives the covering unit is provided, and the covering driving unit is driven and controlled by the sub-control unit”. In this case, it is possible to reliably match the display mode of the sub display unit and the driving state of the covering driving unit while reducing the control burden on the main controlling unit as compared with the case where the main controlling unit controls the covering driving unit. it can.

Means A-5. The main display means and the sub display means are:
When the covering means is in the exposed position, a display mode using a display unit installed in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means in the covering position among the sub-display means; and The same display mode composed of the display mode of the main display means,
The means A-4 is configured so that it can be derived without using the display portion covered by the covering means among the sub-display means when the covering means is in the covering position. The gaming machine described.

Means A-6. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display portion of the sub display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub display means different from the first covering means. Means and
The main display means and the sub display means are:
The sub-display means is visible when the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, and the display form of the main display means. The same display mode as
It is possible to derive the display mode of the sub display unit and the display mode of the main display unit that are visible when the first coating unit is in the exposed position and the second coating unit is in the coating position. The gaming machine according to means A-4 or A-5, characterized in that it is configured as described above.

  As a specific example of means A-5 and means A-6, three same segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as first sub display means, main display means, and second sub display means from the left. First covering means capable of covering the first sub display means and second covering means capable of covering the second sub display means are provided. When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, “1” is displayed on the main display means and “3” is displayed on the second sub-display means. When the first covering means is in the exposed position and the second covering means is in the covering position, “1” is displayed on the first sub display means and “3” is displayed on the main display means. In both cases, the same number “13” is displayed. Thus, although the display (teaching content) of the main display means is different, when combined with the display of the sub display means, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, thereby making it difficult to understand the fixed display of the main display means. The above-mentioned operational effects are more reliably achieved. By adopting the configuration of the means A-3, it is not a coincidence that the same display mode is derived as the entire display part of the main display means and the sub display means even if the position of the covering means is different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (by pinpointing) or deriving (by limiting the corresponding patterns to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the means A-6 is adopted, the main display means visually recognized by the player by the first covering means and the second covering means operating in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction). The area obtained by adding the area of the display unit and the area of the display unit of the sub-display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main display unit and the sub display unit must be changed due to the difference in area.

  Note that the number of covering means having a relationship such as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means A-6 is not particularly limited. For example, the covering means are respectively provided on the top, bottom, left and right of the main display means. It is good also as providing. Further, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is not limited to one constituted by a single plate-like body. For example, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is constituted by a plurality of plate-like bodies, and each is independent by a driving means. Thus, it may be configured to be operable.

  Means A-7. The main display unit and the sub display unit each include a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are mounted, and the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit include the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized by comprising means.

  According to the means A-7, the control can be simplified compared with the case where the main display means and the sub display means are constituted by the liquid crystal display device, and the design is made compared with the case where the main display means and the sub display means are constituted by the segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. It should be noted that “the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix as a whole”. In this case, the design is improved, and the effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary between the main display means and the sub display means is further exhibited.

Means A-8. On the display unit side of the main display means and the sub display means, a mounting panel is provided in which insertion holes into which the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means can be inserted individually are formed,
The main display means and the sub display means include means A-7, wherein the light emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means A-8, the light emitting substrates of the main display means and the sub display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means can be installed on the same plane without deviation. For example, the light emission means of the main display means and the light emission means of the sub display means are compared with the case where they are displaced. Can be difficult to distinguish.

  Further, the mounting panel can hide the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub display means and the surface of the light emitting substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means, and to improve design and convenience.

Means A-9. The plurality of light emitting means of the main display means are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix with the light emitting means of the main display means so as to follow the matrix of the light emitting means of the main display means,
The fixed display performs a variable display by changing the position or combination of the light emitting means to be lit among the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means, and after a specified time, the main display means The plurality of light emitting means are configured to be lit in a combination corresponding to the lottery result,
During the variable display of the main display means, the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means are regular in the overall arrangement by the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means. The game machine according to means A-7 or A-8, characterized in that it is repeatedly turned on and off.

  For example, when a plurality of light emitting means of the main display means arranged in a matrix are regularly turned on in sequence, the arrangement of the light emitting means of the main display means is interrupted, but instead, the light emitting means of the sub display means In such a case, by turning on the light emitting means of the sub display means, a regular lighting mode can be applied to the entire main display means and sub display means. Therefore, the appearance of the variable display on the main display means is improved (becomes natural), and the separation between the light emission means of the main display means and the light emission means of the sub display means can be made difficult to understand. At the time of stoppage, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means is more reliably achieved.

  Means A-10. During the variable display of the main display means, in a state where at least one of the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means is lit, at least one of the light emitting means of the main display means is in a lit state. A gaming machine according to means A-9, characterized in that:

  According to the means A-10, it can be surely shown that the main display means is in a variable display.

  Means A-11. An operation that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub-display means, and that corresponds to (interlocks with) the effect display of the effect display means ( The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10, comprising decoration (display) means for performing decoration display.

  According to the means A-11, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main display means, and even if the peripheral part of the main display means is visually recognized, the effect display means performs a flashy effect display. For example, the operation of the decoration means corresponding to the effect display is easily distracted. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means is further exhibited.

  “The decoration means is decoration display means for performing decoration display corresponding to the effect display, and the decoration display means has the same display unit as the display unit of the main display unit and the sub display unit. It may be ”. Further, as the decoration means, instead of or in addition to the decoration display means, “adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub display means, directly or indirectly by the sub control means. It is good also as providing the movable decoration means by which the operation | movement corresponding to the said effect display of the said effect display means is controlled (linked) is performed.

  Means A-12. The gaming machine according to means A-11, wherein the decoration means changes before and after the end timing of the confirmation display.

  According to the means A-12, since the mode change of the decoration means occurs at the timing of completion of the fixed display, it is possible to easily guide the line of sight toward the decoration means at the timing of completion of the fixed display. Therefore, the above-described effect of making it difficult to grasp the final display of the main display means is further exhibited.

  In addition, you may comprise a decoration means so that the appearance may become flashy later, before the timing of completion | finish of a fixed display. As decoration display means, for example, there is no change in lighting before the end of the final display (the one that has disappeared remains off, the one that remains on remains on), and the lighting and extinction changes rapidly after the end. You may comprise. Further, for example, white display may be performed before the end of the fixed display, but various colors may be displayed after the end. Further, as the movable decoration means, for example, it may be configured in a frame shape so as to surround the main display means and the sub display means, and may be configured not to be displaced before the end of the final display but to be displaced after the end. . When these configurations are employed, the effect of attracting interest to the decoration means at the timing of the end of the final display is further exhibited.

  Means A-13. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-12, wherein at least one of the main display means and the sub display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means A-13, it is possible to completely change the entire display mode constituted by the display mode of the main display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit, and recognize the display mode of the main display unit and confirm the display. Can make it more difficult to grasp.

Means A-14. The confirmation display is performed by causing the main display means to variably display the identification information, and to stop display the identification information in a manner associated with the result of the success / failure lottery,
In the main display unit, after the variable information display of the identification information is stopped and displayed, the stop mode of the identification information is maintained for a specified time, and a variable interval period for prohibiting the start of variable display of the identification information is set,
When the variation display of the identification information is not started after the variation interval period has elapsed, the identification information is associated with a state in which the variation display of the identification information is not performed. A gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13.

  According to the means A-14, it is possible to prevent the effect of making it difficult to grasp the fixed display from fading by displaying the fixed display stop mode (the result of the success / failure lottery) forever.

  B. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means (see, for example, JP-A-2006-271480).

  Further, when a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means during the fluctuation display on the main display means, the fluctuation display for that amount is stored and held after the current fluctuation display. It has been known. In addition, there are many that are provided with a hold display means for teaching the number of hold storages for variable display.

  By the way, in general, an upper limit is set for the variable display hold storage, and the hold storage exceeding the upper limit is not performed. For this reason, there is a relatively large difference in game results (for example, the final difference) between a player who is playing a game so that the variable display hold memory does not exceed the upper limit, and a player who keeps firing a game ball. There is a concern that there will be a difference in game value to be acquired.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is between a player who visually recognizes the hold display means and a player who does not visually recognize the hold display means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in game results.

Means B-1. A launching means for launching a game ball;
A game area provided on the front side of the game board and guiding a game ball fired by the launching means;
A starting entrance means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
A starting entrance detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entrance means;
Based on the detection of the starting entrance detection means, a main control is performed to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to the player and to generate the special gaming state based on the result of the determination Means,
In a gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
An information acquisition means for acquiring information used in the lottery determination when the start ball detection means is detected;
A reserve storage means capable of storing a plurality of information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number;
If the start ball detection means is detected during execution of the final display on the main display means (during variable display), the final display corresponding to the detection is displayed as the final display being executed. The configuration performed after
A hold display means that is directly controlled by the main control means and teaches the number of hold memories stored in the hold storage means;
A sub-display unit that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control unit and that can perform switching display when the information acquired by the information acquisition unit is stored in the hold storage unit. ,
The sub-display unit is disposed adjacent to the hold display unit and includes a display unit similar to the display unit of the hold display unit.

  According to the means B-1, in the same way as the hold display means, the sub display device whose display mode changes when the information acquired by the information acquisition means is stored in the hold storage means is the hold display means. In addition to being provided adjacent to each other, the sub display means includes a display unit similar to the hold display means. For this reason, it becomes difficult to understand which of the display modes of the hold display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit is, and as a result, it is difficult to understand the pattern of the display mode of the hold display unit. Can be difficult). Therefore, whether or not the information used for the winning lottery is newly stored in the holding storage means, or how many times the information used for the winning lottery is stored in the holding storage means (how many holding memories are stored) It can be difficult to understand.

  Thereby, while visually recognizing the display mode of the hold display means (the number of hold memories taught by), an efficient game based on such information (a game ball is not fired in a state where the upper limit of the hold memory is reached, etc.) ) And a player who keeps firing a game ball (for example, a player who does not know the display mode of the hold display means, or wants to enjoy the effects of the effect display means, etc. A difference in game results (for example, a difference in game value to be finally obtained) with a player who does not visually recognize the means can be minimized. In other words, the player who does the game immediately responding to the display mode of the hold display means gains, and relatively suppresses the situation that the player who does not visually recognize the hold display means loses. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suppress the consciousness of losing unless the holding display means is confirmed at any time, and to fully enjoy the effect display of the effect display means.

  In addition, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the hold display of the hold display means, the control load of the main control means is reduced compared with the case where the hold display of the hold display means is more complicated, or the hold display means is simplified. It can be planned.

  Means B-2. Of the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit, at least a part of one of the display units is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the other. Gaming machine.

  According to the means B-2, the display mode of the hold display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit are more complicated. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to instantly recognize and grasp the display mode of the hold display unit from the entire display mode configured by the display mode of the hold display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit.

Means B-3. The main control means is configured to be able to output information relating to the display mode of the hold display means to the sub control means,
The gaming machine according to means B-1 or B-2, wherein the sub control means determines a display mode of the sub display means based on information relating to a display mode of the hold display means.

  According to the means B-3, the display mode of the sub display means can be matched with the display mode of the hold display means. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display unit is more effectively combined with the display mode of the hold display unit to derive a more sensible display, or the stop mode of the sub display unit is combined with the stop mode of the hold display unit. In addition, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived. Therefore, the operational effect of making the display mode pattern of the hold display means more difficult to understand is further exhibited.

  Means B-4. It is characterized by comprising covering means that can be displaced between a covering position that covers a part of the display part of the sub display means and an exposed position that exposes the part of the display part of the sub display means. A gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-3.

  According to the means B-4, the entire display composed of the display mode of the hold display means and the display mode of the sub display means is changed by changing the covering range of the sub display means by the displacement of the covering means. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it can be made more difficult to recognize and grasp the display mode of the hold display means.

  The display part of the hold display means is configured not to be covered by the covering means. Further, “a covering driving unit that drives the covering unit is provided, and the covering driving unit is driven and controlled by the sub-control unit”. In this case, it is possible to reliably match the display mode of the sub display unit and the driving state of the covering driving unit while reducing the control burden on the main controlling unit as compared with the case where the main controlling unit controls the covering driving unit. it can.

Means B-5. The hold display means and the sub display means are:
When the covering means is in the exposed position, a display mode using a display unit installed in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means in the covering position among the sub-display means; and The same display mode configured with the display mode of the hold display means,
In means B-4, the sub-display means can be derived without using the display part covered by the covering means when the covering means is in the covering position. The gaming machine described.

Means B-6. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display portion of the sub display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub display means different from the first covering means. Means and
The hold display means and the sub display means are:
The sub-display means is visible when the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, and the display form of the holding display means. The same display mode as
It is possible to derive the display mode of the sub display unit and the display mode of the hold display unit that are visible when the first coating unit is in the exposed position and the second coating unit is in the coating position. The gaming machine according to means B-4 or B-5, characterized in that it is configured as described above.

  According to the means B-5 and the means B-6, the display (teaching contents) of the hold display means is different, but when combined with the display of the sub display means, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as the whole. The above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the display mode of the display means can be achieved more reliably. By adopting the configuration of the means B-3, it is not a coincidence that the same display mode is derived as the entire display part of the holding display means and the sub display means even if the position of the covering means is different. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of deriving by aiming (by pinpointing) or deriving (by limiting the corresponding patterns to some extent).

  In particular, when the configuration of the means B-6 is adopted, the hold display means visually recognized by the player by the first covering means and the second covering means operating in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction). The area obtained by adding the area of the display unit and the area of the display unit of the sub-display means can always be the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the hold display unit and the sub display unit must be changed due to the difference in area.

  The number of covering means having the relationship as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means B-6 is not particularly limited. For example, the covering means are respectively provided on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the holding display means. It is good also as providing. Further, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is not limited to one constituted by a single plate-like body. For example, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is constituted by a plurality of plate-like bodies, and each is independent by a driving means. Thus, it may be configured to be operable.

  Means B-7. The hold display unit and the sub display unit each include a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are mounted. The display unit of the hold display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit include the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, characterized by comprising means.

  According to the means B-7, control is simplified compared with the case where the hold display means and the sub display means are configured by the liquid crystal display device, and the design is compared with the case where the hold display means and the sub display means are configured by the segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. It should be noted that “the light emission means of the hold display means and the light emission means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix as a whole”. In this case, the design is improved, and the effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary between the hold display means and the sub display means is further exhibited.

Means B-8. On the display unit side of the hold display means and the sub display means, a mounting panel is provided in which insertion holes into which the light emitting means of the hold display means and the sub display means can be inserted individually are formed,
The holding display means and the sub display means include means B-7, wherein the light emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means B-8, the light-emitting substrate of the holding display means and the sub display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Accordingly, the light emission means of the hold display means and the sub display means can be installed on the same plane without deviation. For example, the light emission means of the hold display means and the light emission means of the sub display means are compared with the case where they are displaced. Can be difficult to distinguish.

  Further, the mounting panel can hide the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the holding display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub display means, and the surface of the light emitting substrate. Can be difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the light emitting means of the hold display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means, and to improve design and convenience.

  Means B-9. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein at least one of the hold display means and the sub display means is configured to be displaceable.

  According to the means B-9, the entire display mode composed of the display mode of the hold display unit and the display mode of the sub display unit can be changed completely, the display mode of the hold display unit is recognized, and the confirmation display Can make it more difficult to grasp.

Means B-10. In the game area, provided with a distance through which a game ball can pass between the game board and the game board, comprising at least start covering means for covering the front of the start ball entering means,
In the game area, a cover area whose front is covered by the start covering means is provided with a pseudo winning detection means capable of detecting a game ball moving in the cover area,
The means B-1 to B-9 are configured to be able to derive a pseudo winning mode as if the start ball detecting means was detected based on the detection of the pseudo prize detecting means. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the means B-10, the pseudo winning award detection means is provided together with the start ball entering means in the covered area covered front by the start covering means. That is, in the configuration in which the start covering means is provided so that the visibility of whether or not a game ball has entered the start entering means is relatively low, the start covering is based on the detection of the pseudo winning detection means. Deriving a pseudo winning mode in which a game ball that has entered the covering area on the back side of the means may have entered the starting pitching means (for example, pseudo winning detection means installed in the covering area in the same manner as the starting pitching means) Based on this detection, a reaction similar to the case where the starting ball detection means is detected is derived, or if it is derived, the reaction is suggested by the detection of the starting ball detection means Etc.). Therefore, in addition to “entered” and “not entered” as the action of the game ball against the starting entry means, a pattern of “may have entered” can be added. In addition, it is possible to increase the types of effects and diversify the effects. As a result, the start covering means is provided to make it difficult to know whether or not the game ball enters the start ball entry means (the effect of whether the game ball has entered the start ball entry means). It can be improved and the interest can be improved.

  Moreover, even if the pseudo-winning mode is derived by providing a configuration that makes it difficult to instantly grasp the display mode of the hold display unit like the unit B-1, if the hold display unit is visually recognized, It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is immediately grasped that the reserved memory is not increased (that is, a pseudo winning mode).

  Note that there may be one or more starting ball entering means. In addition, “the starting covering means may be attached to the game board”. In addition, examples of the pseudo-winning mode include a display mode in a predetermined display unit, a voice mode by a voice output unit, a light emission mode by a predetermined light emitting unit, and a combination thereof.

  C. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, there are many cases where an effect display means is provided that follows the change display performed by the main display means and performs change display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, refer to JP 2006-271480 A). In the effect display means, even when the result of the lottery is taught in the main display means, the result of the lottery result may be postponed only as a rough suggestion of the result of the lottery. Thereby, the opportunity of production can be increased, an inflection etc. can be attached by a game, and improvement of production performance, game performance, etc. can be aimed at.

  By the way, there is a case where the game can be advantageously advanced by knowing the result of the lottery first, in this case, the game in which the game is performed while grasping the display mode of the main display means and visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired) between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, by enjoying the effect on the effect display means There is a concern that will be attached.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is between a player who visually recognizes the main display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in game results.

Means C-1. A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Sub-display means that is controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means, and that performs pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the final display of the main display means,
The sub display unit is arranged side by side with the main display unit, and includes a display unit similar to a display unit for performing the final display of the main display unit,
A first combined mode combining the first mode of the final display of the main display unit that teaches the first result in the lottery determination and the pseudo display mode of the sub-display unit;
A second mode different from the first mode of the final display of the main display means that teaches a second result different from the first result in the winning / failing lottery mode, and a mode of the pseudo display of the sub display unit So that the second composite aspect combined with the same display aspect (the displayed position is different, but the shape is the same)
A gaming machine characterized in that the pseudo display mode of the sub display means can be derived.

  According to the means C-1, a pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display means is performed on the sub display means arranged side by side with the main display means (not related to the result of the lottery determination), and the sub display means Since the display unit similar to the main display means is provided, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the fixed display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and consequently, it is difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Can be difficult). Therefore, for example, while confirming the confirmation display (contents taught by) of the main display means, the player who wants to play an efficient game based on such information and the confirmation display of the main display means are grasped. Difference in game results between players who do not see the main display means because they want to enjoy another performance performed in parallel with the final display (for example, the game that is finally acquired) Value difference) can be minimized. In other words, the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the main display means gains relatively, and relatively suppresses the situation where the player who does not visually recognize the main display means loses. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the confirmation display pattern of the main display means and to suppress the consciousness of losing if the main display means is not visually recognized. Can be fully enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in order to make it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means, pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the confirmation display on the main display means, the control burden on the main control means can be reduced or the main display means can be simplified compared to the case where the confirmation display on the main display means is more complicated. It can be planned.

  Further, according to the means C-1, by appropriately changing the pseudo display mode of the sub display unit, for example, the first mode of the final display of the main display unit that teaches the first result in the lottery determination, A first combined mode combining a pseudo display mode of the display unit, a second mode of a fixed display of the main display unit that teaches a second result different from the first result in the winning / failing lottery, and a sub-display The second composite mode combined with the pseudo display mode of the means is configured to be the same display mode (the displayed position is different but the shape is the same). Specifically, for example, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as a first sub display unit, a main display unit, and a second sub display unit from the left. Then, “1” (first mode) is displayed on the main display means, “3” is displayed on the second sub display means, the first sub display means is completely turned off, and “1” is displayed on the first sub display means. “1” is displayed, “3” (first mode) is displayed on the main display unit, and the second sub-display unit is all turned off, “13” (first composite mode, second mode) The same number “composite mode” is displayed. Thus, although the display (teaching content) of the main display means is different, when combined with the display of the sub display means, it is possible to derive a mode that looks the same as a whole, thereby making it difficult to understand the fixed display of the main display means. The above-mentioned operational effects are more reliably achieved.

  In the case of realizing a pachinko machine as a gaming machine, for example, “a first special gaming state is given as the first result, a second special gaming state is given as the second result, and the first In the special game state and the second special game state, the number of rounds and the end condition of each round are the same (directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control unit, the first result, and In the configuration in which the game mode given after the end of the special game state is different, the first composite aspect is provided, although the effect display by the effect display means for effect display for suggesting the second result is the same). And the second composite mode are derived (although the first mode and the second mode are different, the combined mode as a whole is changed to the same display mode by combining the pseudo display). Good. In this case, in order to grasp in advance the game mode given after the end of the special game state, it is only possible to grasp the first mode and the second mode. By making it difficult to grasp, the action and effect of deferring the timing at which the already determined contents are taught as much as possible and deriving various effects in the meantime are more effectively achieved. .

  Note that “the first composite mode and the second composite mode are the same display mode” is a combination of the final display mode of the main display unit and the pseudo display mode of the sub display unit. The aspect is that the same shape can be displayed at different positions.

  Means C-2. It is characterized by comprising covering means that can be displaced between a covering position that covers a part of the display part of the sub display means and an exposed position that exposes the part of the display part of the sub display means. A gaming machine according to means C-1.

  According to the means C-2, the entire display composed of the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub display means is changed by changing the covering range of the sub display means by the displacement of the covering means. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it is more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display means and grasp the fixed display.

  It should be noted that the display unit of the main display means is preferably configured not to be covered with the covering means. Further, “a covering driving unit that drives the covering unit is provided, and the covering driving unit is driven and controlled by the sub-control unit”. In this case, it is possible to reliably match the display mode of the sub display unit and the driving state of the covering driving unit while reducing the control burden on the main controlling unit as compared with the case where the main controlling unit controls the covering driving unit. it can. In addition, in the first composite mode or the second composite mode, it is also possible to configure so that the entire sub display unit is covered with the covering unit.

Means C-3. The first composite aspect is configured to be able to be derived without using a display portion covered by the covering means among the sub-display means when the covering means is in the covering position.
In the second composite aspect, when the covering means is at the exposed position, a display unit installed in a range where the front is covered by at least the covering means at the covering position among the sub-display means is used. The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be derived.

Means C-4. The covering means includes a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display portion of the sub display means, and a second covering capable of covering a portion of the display portion of the sub display means different from the first covering means. Means and
The first composite mode includes a display mode of the sub display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is at the coating position and the second coating unit is at the exposed position, and the main display. The display mode of the means,
The second composite mode includes a display mode of the sub-display unit that is visible when the first coating unit is in the exposed position and the second coating unit is in the coating position, and the main display. The gaming machine according to means C-2 or C-3, characterized in that it is configured by means of display means.

  According to the means C-3 and the means C-4, the unused area can be hidden by the covering means. For example, the composite display position combined with the fixed display of the main display means and the pseudo display of the sub display means The relative positional relationship with the position of the covering means is different (the first combined aspect is displayed at a position close to the covering means, while the second combined aspect is displayed at a position far from the covering means. Alternatively, among the sub-display means, the first composite mode and the second are based on the fact that the region of the eyelid used in the second composite mode is not used). It is possible to suppress a situation in which it is easy to grasp which of these composite modes.

  As specific examples of means C-3 and means C-4, three identical segment display devices are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and are configured as first sub display means, main display means, and second sub display means from the left. In addition, a first covering means capable of covering the first sub display means and a second covering means capable of covering the second sub display means are provided. When the first covering means is at the covering position and the second covering means is at the exposed position, “1” is displayed on the main display means and “3” is displayed on the second sub-display means. When the first covering means is in the exposed position and the second covering means is in the covering position, “1” is displayed on the first sub display means and “3” is displayed on the main display means. In both cases, the same number “13” is displayed.

  Further, the number of covering means having a relationship such as the first covering means and the second covering means of the means C-4 is not particularly limited. For example, the covering means are respectively provided on the top, bottom, left and right of the main display means. It is good also as providing. Further, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is not limited to one constituted by a single plate-like body. For example, each of the first covering means and the second covering means is constituted by a plurality of plate-like bodies, and each is independent by a driving means. Thus, it may be configured to be operable.

  Means C-5. The first display state from which the first composite aspect is derived and the second display state from which the second composite aspect is derived are visually recognized among the display units of the main display unit and the sub display unit. The gaming machine according to means C-4, wherein the covering means is configured to be displaceable so that the sum of possible areas is the same or substantially the same.

  According to the means C-5, for example, either the first display state or the second display state can be obtained by operating the first covering means and the second covering means in synchronization (moving the same distance in the same direction) or the like. However, the area obtained by adding the area of the display section of the main display means visually recognized by the player and the area of the display section of the sub display means can be made substantially the same. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation where it is determined that the identification method for the display mode by the main display unit and the sub display unit must be changed due to the difference in area.

Means C-6. The main control means is configured to be able to output information on the final display of the main display means to the sub-control means,
The sub-control unit determines the pseudo display of the sub-display unit based on information on the final display of the main display unit, according to any one of the units C-1 to C-5 Gaming machine.

  According to the means C-6, with respect to the composite display combining the fixed display of the main display means and the pseudo display of the sub display means, a composite display having the same display mode is derived although the display positions are different. It is possible to increase the possibility of deriving such a phenomenon not by chance but aiming (pinpoint) or deriving (by limiting the patterns to be associated to some extent). Therefore, the effect of making the confirmation display pattern of the main display means more difficult to understand is more reliably produced, and the display mode of the sub display means is combined with the display mode of the main display means more effectively. The improvement of property etc. can be aimed at.

  Means C-7. The main display unit and the sub display unit each include a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of light emitting units are mounted, and the display unit of the main display unit and the display unit of the sub display unit include the plurality of light emitting units. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-6, characterized by comprising means.

  According to the means C-7, the control and the like are simplified compared with the case where the main display means and the sub display means are constituted by the liquid crystal display device, and the design is made compared with the case where the main display means and the sub display means are constituted by the segment display device. The degree of freedom is improved. It should be noted that “the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix as a whole”. In this case, the design is improved, and the effect of making it difficult to understand the boundary between the main display means and the sub display means is further exhibited.

Means C-8. On the display unit side of the main display means and the sub display means, a mounting panel is provided in which insertion holes into which the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means can be inserted individually are formed,
The main display means and the sub display means include means C-7, wherein the light emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means C-8, the light emitting substrates of the main display means and the sub display means can be positioned by the mounting panel. Therefore, the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means can be installed on the same plane without deviation. For example, the light emission means of the main display means and the light emission means of the sub display means are compared with the case where they are displaced. Can be difficult to distinguish.

  Further, the mounting panel can hide the boundary between the light emitting substrate of the main display means and the light emitting substrate of the sub display means and the surface of the light emitting substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to make it more difficult to distinguish between the light emitting means of the main display means and the light emitting means of the sub display means, and to improve design and convenience.

Means C-9. The plurality of light emitting means of the main display means are arranged in a matrix,
The plurality of light emitting means of the sub display means are arranged in a matrix with the light emitting means of the main display means so as to follow the matrix of the light emitting means of the main display means,
The fixed display performs a variable display by changing the position or combination of the light emitting means to be lit among the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means, and after a specified time, the main display means The plurality of light emitting means are configured to be lit in a combination corresponding to the lottery result,
During the variable display of the main display means, the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means are regular in the overall arrangement by the plurality of light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means. The gaming machine according to means C-7 or C-8, characterized in that it is repeatedly turned on and off.

  For example, when a plurality of light emitting means of the main display means arranged in a matrix are regularly turned on in sequence, the arrangement of the light emitting means of the main display means is interrupted, but instead, the light emitting means of the sub display means In such a case, by turning on the light emitting means of the sub display means, a regular lighting mode can be applied to the entire main display means and sub display means. Therefore, the appearance of the variable display on the main display means is improved (becomes natural), and the separation between the light emission means of the main display means and the light emission means of the sub display means can be made difficult to understand. At the time of stoppage, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means is more reliably achieved.

  Means C-10. During the variable display of the main display means, in a state where at least one of the light emitting means of the main display means and the sub display means is lit, at least one of the light emitting means of the main display means is in a lit state. A gaming machine according to means C-9, characterized in that:

  According to the means C-10, it can be surely shown that the main display means is in a variable display.

Means C-11. Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
An operation that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub-display means, and that corresponds to (interlocks with) the effect display of the effect display means ( The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-10, comprising: decoration (display) means for performing decoration display.

  According to the means C-11, it is more difficult to instantaneously determine the display mode of the main display means, and even if the peripheral part of the main display means is visually recognized, the effect display means performs a flashy effect display. For example, the operation of the decoration means corresponding to the effect display is easily distracted. Therefore, the above-mentioned effect of making it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means is further exhibited.

  Incidentally, in correspondence with the means C-5, “the main display means in the first display state from which the first composite aspect is derived and the second display state from which the second composite aspect is derived. And the covering means is displaced so that the sum of the visible areas of the display portion of the sub-display means is the same or substantially the same, so that the visible area of the decorative means is the same or substantially the same. It may be the same. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is easy to understand whether the decoration means is in the first display state or the second display state due to a change in the visual recognition mode.

  “The decoration means is decoration display means for performing decoration display corresponding to the effect display, and the decoration display means has the same display unit as the display unit of the main display unit and the sub display unit. It may be ”. Further, as the decoration means, instead of or in addition to the decoration display means, “adjacent to at least one of the main display means and the sub display means, directly or indirectly by the sub control means. It is good also as providing the movable decoration means by which the operation | movement corresponding to the said effect display of the said effect display means is controlled (linked) is performed.

  D. One type of gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a pachinko machine, a lottery such as whether or not to generate a hit state is performed based on a predetermined trigger such as a game ball launched by the launching unit entering a starting ball entering unit provided on the game board At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery is performed on the main display means.

  Further, there are many cases where an effect display means is provided that follows the change display performed by the main display means and performs change display for effect to teach or suggest the result of the lottery ( For example, refer to JP 2006-271480 A). In the effect display means, even when the result of the lottery is taught in the main display means, the result of the lottery result may be postponed only as a rough suggestion of the result of the lottery. Thereby, the opportunity of production can be increased, an inflection etc. can be attached by a game, and improvement of production performance, game performance, etc. can be aimed at.

  By the way, there is a case where the game can be advantageously advanced by knowing the result of the lottery first, in this case, the game in which the game is performed while grasping the display mode of the main display means and visually recognizing the main display means A relatively large difference in game results (for example, a difference in game value finally acquired) between a player and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means, for example, by enjoying the effect on the effect display means There is a concern that will be attached.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and its purpose is between a player who visually recognizes the main display means and a player who does not visually recognize the main display means. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a difference in game results.

Means D-1. A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
A gaming machine comprising: irradiation means capable of irradiating light toward the main display means.

  According to the means D-1, the light of the irradiating means is applied to the range including the boundary portion between the part constituting the definite display and the peripheral portion of the main display means, thereby making the contrast between the two as ambiguous as possible. By irradiating the light of the irradiation means to the part of the main display means that can constitute the fixed display, whether or not the corresponding part currently constitutes the fixed display (what is displayed Or whether nothing is displayed). For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display means (to make it difficult to make a determination in an instant). Therefore, for example, while confirming the confirmation display (contents taught by) of the main display means, the player who wants to play an efficient game based on such information and the confirmation display of the main display means are grasped. Difference in game results (for example, the game value to be finally acquired) with a player who does not visually recognize the main display means because he wants to enjoy an effect different from the main display means. (Difference) can be made as small as possible. In other words, the player who plays the game immediately corresponding to the display mode of the main display means gains relatively, and relatively suppresses the situation where the player who does not visually recognize the main display means loses. be able to. As a result, it is possible to grasp the pattern of the fixed display on the main display means and suppress the consciousness of losing if the main display means is not visually recognized. You can enjoy it.

Means D-2. In the configuration in which the main display unit includes a plurality of light emitting units, and the confirmation display is performed by the plurality of light emitting units.
The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein a material having a higher reflectance than that of the light emitting means is used for the periphery of the light emitting means.

  According to the means D-2, by irradiating the light of the irradiating means, the boundary between the part constituting the confirmed display and its peripheral part is made as ambiguous as possible in the confirmed display among the main display means. The effect of performing will be further exhibited.

Means D-3. The main display means includes a plurality of light emitting means, and the confirmation display is performed by the plurality of light emitting means.
In the configuration in which the irradiating means irradiates light toward the light emitting means from an oblique front of the light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, wherein a peripheral portion of the light emitting means is inclined toward the irradiation means.

  According to the means D-3, the light from the oblique front irradiated by the irradiation means can be efficiently reflected forward.

Means D-4. The main display means includes a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of the light emitting means are mounted, and a display unit of the main display means is constituted by the plurality of light emitting means,
On the display portion side of the main display means, there is provided a mounting panel formed with insertion holes into which the light emitting means of the main display means can be individually inserted,
The main display means is any one of means D-1 to D-3, wherein the light emitting means is inserted into the insertion hole, and the light emitting substrate is fixed in contact with the mounting panel. The gaming machine described.

  According to the means D-4, the difference in position between the front end portion of the light emitting means and the peripheral portion of the light emitting means can be minimized in the front-rear direction, and the boundary between the light emitting means and the peripheral portion of the light emitting means. The above-mentioned effects such as making it difficult to understand are more effectively exhibited. Further, the peripheral portion of the light emitting means (the front end portion thereof) is a mounting panel, so that the processing of the peripheral portion of the light emitting means (such as increasing the reflectivity or forming a concave shape as described above) is relatively easy. It can be done freely and easily.

  Further, the control is simplified as compared with the case where the main display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the degree of freedom of design is improved as compared with the case where it is constituted by a segment display device. Further, for example, when a plurality of light emitting substrates are arranged at relatively close positions (a plurality of light emitting substrates of the main display means may be provided, or a light emitting substrate of the main display means and a light emitting substrate of a display means different from the main display means) The plurality of light emitting substrates can be positioned by collectively attaching them to the mounting panel. Therefore, a plurality of light emitting means can be installed on the same plane without deviation. In addition, the mounting panel can hide the boundaries between the plurality of light emitting substrates and the surface of the light emitting substrate. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the designability and the convenience.

  Means D-5. The gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, wherein the irradiation means changes in form before and after the end timing of the confirmation display.

  According to the means D-5, the effect of making the confirmation display of the main display means difficult to grasp is further exhibited by irradiating light more strongly from the irradiation means at the timing of completion of the confirmation display. Become.

  The irradiating means may be configured to switch from the unlit state to the lit state, for example, before and after the final display end timing, and there is no change in the lighting state before the final display ends (disappears). It may be configured so that lighting and extinguishing change rapidly after completion. Further, for example, white display may be performed before the end of the fixed display, but various colors may be displayed after the end.

Means D-6. Sub-display means that is controlled directly or indirectly by the sub-control means, and that performs pseudo display in which the start and end timing is synchronized with the final display of the main display means,
The sub display unit is arranged side by side with the main display unit, and includes a display unit similar to a display unit for performing the final display of the main display unit,
The irradiating means is configured to be able to irradiate light to a portion between the main display means and the sub-display means. The means according to any one of means D-1 to D-5 Gaming machine.

  According to the means D-6, a pseudo display synchronized with the final display of the main display means is performed on the sub display means arranged adjacent to the main display means (not related to the result of the lottery determination), and the sub display means Since the display unit similar to the display unit is provided, the pseudo display has a display mode similar to the fixed display. For this reason, it is difficult to understand which of the display modes of the main display unit and the sub display unit is the display mode of the main display unit, and consequently, it is difficult to understand the final display pattern of the main display unit. Can be difficult). Therefore, the above-described effect of suppressing the consciousness of grasping the pattern of the fixed display of the main display means and losing if the main display means is not visually recognized will be further exhibited.

  Further, in order to make it difficult to understand the final display of the main display means, pseudo display is performed by the sub display means controlled by the sub control means. Therefore, for example, in order to make it difficult to understand the confirmation display on the main display means, the control burden on the main control means can be reduced or the main display means can be simplified compared to the case where the confirmation display on the main display means is more complicated. It can be planned.

  Furthermore, by irradiating light between the main display means and the sub display means, it becomes difficult to recognize the boundary between the main display means and the sub display means. The confirmation display pattern is difficult to recognize. Thereby, the effect of suppressing the consciousness of grasping the pattern of the definite display of the main display means and losing if the main display means is not visually recognized will be further exhibited.

  Note that “the irradiation unit is controlled by the sub-control unit”. In this case, it is possible to reliably match the display mode of the sub display unit and the irradiation state of the irradiation unit while reducing the control burden on the main control unit as compared with the case where the main control unit executes the control of the irradiation unit. Further, “the main control unit is configured to be able to output information on the fixed display of the main display unit to the sub control unit, and the sub control unit is based on the information on the fixed display of the main display unit. Then, the pseudo display of the sub display means and the irradiation mode of the irradiation means may be determined ". In this case, the display mode of the sub display unit and the irradiation mode of the irradiation unit can be matched with the display mode of the main display unit. Therefore, the display mode of the sub display unit and the irradiation mode of the irradiation unit are more effectively combined with the display mode of the main display unit to derive a more reminiscent display or the sub display unit stop mode. In combination with the stop mode of the main display means, a display having a predetermined meaning can be derived.

Means D-7. A covering means capable of displacing between a covering position that covers a part of the display part of the sub display means and an exposed position that exposes the part of the display part of the sub display means;
The gaming machine according to means D-6, wherein the irradiation means is attached to the back side of the covering means and is configured to be displaceable together with the covering means.

  According to the means D-7, the entire display composed of the display mode of the main display means and the display mode of the sub display means is changed by changing the covering range of the sub display means by the displacement of the covering means. The aspect can be changed. Therefore, it is more difficult to recognize the display mode of the main display means and grasp the fixed display.

  Further, since the irradiating means is attached to the back side of the covering means, it is possible to prevent a positional shift between the position of the covering means and the irradiation mode by the irradiating means. Therefore, for example, in the case where the same display mode of the composite display configured by the final display of the main display unit and the pseudo display of the sub display unit can be derived at different display positions, the display position is In order to make it difficult to understand the difference between the first position and the second position, a configuration is used in which a plurality of covering means are used to cover an unused area in the display portion of the sub display means. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is applied to the irradiation unit on the composite display at the first position, but light from the irradiation unit is not applied to the composite display at the second position. Accordingly, it is possible to easily prevent the covering means from being displaced depending on the light mode of the irradiating means, and to suppress a situation in which it becomes easy to recognize the final display pattern of the main display means. Moreover, the situation which causes the fall of the designability etc. by avoiding the irradiation means itself being visually recognized can be avoided.

  In addition, it is good also as "it is provided with the covering drive means which drives a covering means, and a covering drive means is drive-controlled by a sub-control means." In this case, it is possible to reliably match the display mode of the sub display unit and the driving state of the covering driving unit while reducing the control burden on the main controlling unit as compared with the case where the main controlling unit controls the covering driving unit. it can. Further, “the covering means can cover a first covering means capable of covering a part of the display portion of the sub display means, and a portion of the display portion of the sub display means different from the first covering means. The main display means and the sub display means are visible when the first covering means is in the covering position and the second covering means is in the exposed position. The same display mode as the display mode of the sub display unit and the display mode of the main display unit, the first covering unit is in the exposed position, and the second covering unit is in the covering position It is good also as being comprised so that derivation | leading-out is possible in the display mode of the said sub display means visually recognizable in the case where it exists, and the display mode of the said main display means.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

  a. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A ball ball game machine including a game area where a game ball is guided and each of the winning means (general winning device, variable winning device, start winning device, etc.) arranged in the gaming region.

  b. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a bullet ball gaming machine having a gaming area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed mode example, “an operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by a player, a launching means (shot motor, etc.) for playing and launching a game ball based on an operation of the operation means, A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is constituted by a game board surface) that is guided along the substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning device, And a ball winning machine configured to be able to visually recognize the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

  c. The gaming machine in each of the above means or each of the above ball game machines is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine equivalent to a pachinko machine.

  d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). A spinning-type gaming machine configured to be given game value on condition that the information is specific identification information.

  e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are fused (especially a gaming machine of a slot machine specification that uses a gaming ball as a gaming medium). As a more detailed mode example, “a discriminating information string (a symbol string; specifically a rotating body such as a reel or a belt with a symbol) made up of a plurality of identification information (symbols) is variably displayed (specifically, a reel Variable display means (specifically, a rotating unit such as a reel unit) that stops and displays the identification information sequence after the rotation of the starting information means. The identification information (symbol) starts to fluctuate and the identification information (symbol) fluctuates due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button). The game value is provided on the condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball receiving tray (upper plate or the like) is further provided, taking-in means for taking the game ball from the ball receiving tray, and the ball receiving tray Payout means for paying out game balls Comprising a configuration and gaming machine "and the like as starting condition of the game is satisfied by the game ball is captured by the capturing means.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... 1st variable winning device, 32b ... 2nd variable winning device, 33a ... 1st starting winning device, 33b ... 2nd starting winning device, 34 ... Through gate, 42 ... Decoration symbol display device, 43a ... first special display device, 43b ... second special display device, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub control device.

Claims (1)

A main control means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a special gaming state advantageous to a player, and to generate the special gaming state based on a result of the lottery;
A gaming machine comprising sub-control means capable of executing control based on a signal from the main control means,
Main display means that is directly controlled by the main control means, and a confirmation display for teaching the result of the lottery determination is performed;
Production display means that is directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, and that produces an effect display for teaching or suggesting the result of the success / failure lottery,
A gaming machine comprising: irradiation means capable of irradiating light toward the main display means.

Images